Documenti di Didattica
Documenti di Professioni
Documenti di Cultura
Extremely
Young
Incredibly
Wise:
The
Function
of
Child
Narrators
in
Adult
Fiction
Acknowledgments
I
would
like
to
express
my
thanks
and
wholehearted
appreciation
to
my
supervisor,
Professor
Justin
Edwards,
for
his
useful
support
and
continued
guidance
during
the
dissertation
research.
My
special
thanks
go
to
my
family
and
friends
for
their
sustained
encouragement
and
incessant
patience
during
the
writing
of
this
thesis.
Author Declarations
I
hereby
declare
that
the
present
work
is
the
result
of
my
own
individual
research
and
effort
and
that
I
have
written
it
myself.
The
material
included
in
this
dissertation
has
not
been
submitted
wholly
or
in
part
for
any
academic
award
or
qualification
other
than
for
which
it
is
submitted
now.
All
elements
borrowed
from
other
writers
are
given
their
due
credit.
Linda
STEINMETZ
May
2011
2
Linda
STEINMETZ
professeur-‐candidate
au
Atert-‐Lycée
Redange
3
Abstract
The
following
research
focuses
on
the
function
of
child
narrators
in
adult
fiction.
My
thesis
first
defines
the
notions
of
‘narrator,’
child,’
and
‘adult
literature:’
what
is
a
narrator
and
which
types
of
narrators
are
there?
What
are
the
preconceived
ideas
that
readers
have
in
mind
when
they
think
of
child
narrators?
At
what
point
in
time
did
adults
start
to
analyze
the
child’s
individual
psychology
and
to
define
young
people
as
different
from
grown-‐ups?
And
finally,
what
is
an
adult
and
which
texts
do
we
characterize
as
‘adult
literature?’
Subsequently,
I
am
answering
the
question
why
an
author
would
choose
a
child
as
the
narrator
of
his
story,
rather
than
an
adult.
Which
literary
message
can
a
child
transmit
that
an
adult
fails
to
impart?
And
finally,
which
influence
does
the
author
and
the
reader’s
background
and
prior
experience
have
on
the
reading
process?
In
order
to
answer
the
foregoing
questions,
I
have
discussed
two
novels
in
particular:
The
Life
Before
Us,
by
the
French
writer
Romain
Gary
and
Extremely
Loud
and
Incredibly
Close,
by
the
young
American
author
Jonathan
Safran
Foer.
Furthermore,
my
thesis
incorporates
secondary
literature
and
analyses
other
critics’
points
of
view
in
relation
to
child
narrators,
in
order
to
assure
an
extended
outlook
on
the
discussion
at
hand.
Finally,
my
research
paper
ends
with
the
debate
whether
there
is
such
a
literary
device
as
a
stereotypical
child
narrator
or
whether
all
child
narrators
differ
according
to
the
author
who
created
them
and
according
to
their
literary
function?
Can
a
child
narrator
keep
all
the
characteristics
of
an
average
child
or
does
the
young
narrator
need
to
lose
part
of
his
childlike
mannerism
in
order
to
render
the
story
meaningful
for
an
adult
reader?
In
the
end,
I
would
like
to
highlight
that
it
was
a
challenge
to
find
secondary
material
in
relation
to
my
research
topic,
because
the
analysis
of
the
child
narrator
has
only
recently
become
the
focus
of
literary
criticism.
Moreover,
I
would
like
to
point
out
that
the
present
thesis
just
makes
sense
if
we
see
and
treat
the
literary
child
figure
like
a
real
person.
Otherwise,
the
discussion
would
remain
limited
to
a
purely
hypothetical
level.
4
II
I
A book is not an isolated entity: it is a narration, an
axis of innumerable narrations.
Jorge Borges
III
IV
I go straight from thinking
about my narrator to being
him.
S.E. Hinton
V VI
5
8
1.1.
Motives
It
is
a
common
conception
that
children
are
our
future
and
that
young
people
need
adult
guidance,
in
order
to
fully
develop
their
potential.
Yet,
already
two
thousand
years
ago,
the
Greek
philosopher
Socrates
has
ostensibly
argued
that
children
resist
adult
control,
because
children
love
luxury;
they
have
bad
manners,
contempt
for
authority;
they
show
disrespect
for
elders
and
love
chatter
in
place
of
exercise.
Children
are
now
tyrants,
not
the
servants
of
their
households.
They
no
longer
rise
when
elders
enter
the
room.
They
contradict
their
parents,
chatter
before
company,
gobble
up
dainties
at
the
table,
cross
their
legs,
and
tyrannize
their
teachers.9
Socrates’
view
of
the
young
people
of
his
time
has
gradually
developed
into
cliché
thinking
that
adults
still
voice
nowadays.
The
persistence
of
the
stereotypical
concepts
mentioned
above
illustrates
that
children
and
the
ideal
methods
of
raising
and
educating
them,
in
order
to
secure
a
promising
future,
have
always
been
and
invariably
remain
widely
discussed
topics.
In
the
1930s
the
definition
of
the
child’s
status
in
society
started
to
emerge
more
clearly
and
Phyllis
Blanchard
explains
that
‘growing
recognition
of
the
importance
of
the
early
years
[was]
indicated
by
the
increasing
number
of
nursery
schools
and
centres
for
research
in
the
psychology
of
the
preschool
child.
[…]
Both
welfare
work
and
research
[were]
placing
more
emphasis
upon
the
social
relationships
of
the
child.’10
Consequently,
while
the
child’s
psychology
started
to
capture
public
attention,
there
was
a
simultaneous
movement
that
was
meant
to
define
the
child’s
development
in
relation
to
his
environment
and
cultural
context.
Children
have
become
the
focus
of
psychologists
and
educators,
who
analyze
the
importance
of
upbringing
and
the
influence
of
social
background
on
the
child’s
development
in
more
detail
and
in
a
more
scientifically
founded
way.
8
In
order
to
avoid
the
use
of
awkward
pronoun
combinations
such
as
‘he’
or
‘she’
or
possessive
adjectives
such
as
‘his’
or
‘her,’
I
am
consistently
using
‘he’
to
refer
to
any
person
or
character
in
this
thesis.
This
decision
is
purely
motivated
by
practical,
as
well
as
stylistic
concerns,
and
does
not
carry
any
hidden
socio-‐political
message.
9
Koth,
Amit.
“Socrates.”
Quotationsbook.com:
http://quotationsbook.com/quote/44998/#ixzz1K9ef61bh.
10
Blanchard,
Phyllis.
“Status
of
the
Child.”
The
American
Journal
of
Sociology
35.6
(May
1930):
1085-‐1090,
1085.
9
10
the
story’s
topic
is
a
serious
matter,
like
violence,
abuse
or
financial
hardship.
Where
exactly
this
cheerfulness
in
novels
told
by
a
child
narrator
stems
from
and
how
the
author
manages
to
maintain
the
same
bright
tone
throughout
the
novel
is
one
of
the
questions
that
I
am
going
to
have
a
look
at.
Another
special
aspect
that
I
like
about
novels
featuring
child
narrators
is
that
the
plot
and
characters
of
these
novels
are
just
as
complex
and
challenging
as
those
of
any
other
genre,
but
the
energy
and
vitality
of
the
young
narrator
seems
to
electrify
the
reader
and
spur
the
reading
process
on.
Of
course,
there
are
also
adult
characters,
which
disperse
an
equal
amount
of
‘joie
de
vivre,’
but
listening
to
child
narrators
admiring
their
surrounding
propels
the
reader
into
a
time
period
when
he
was
still
a
child
without
a
care
in
the
world.
Whether
this
carefree
sensation
is
created
in
the
majority
of
cases,
when
a
youngster
narrates
a
story,
or
whether
that
has
just
been
the
case
with
those
books
I
have
read
so
far
will
as
well
be
at
the
core
of
the
following
research.
Finally,
the
stories
told
by
child
narrators
that
I
have
come
across
include
drawings
or
pictures,
which
makes
the
books
interesting
on
a
secondary,
non-‐
literary
level.
In
The
Curious
Incident
of
the
Dog
at
Night-Time
(2003),
by
Mark
Haddon
or
in
Extremely
Loud
&
Incredibly
Close
(2005),
by
Jonathan
Safran
Foer
pictures
accompany
the
text.
On
the
one
hand,
the
pictures
lighten
up
the
reading
process,
because
the
illustrations
allow
the
reader
to
pause
for
a
minute
and
to
digest
the
text,
before
reading
on.
On
the
other
hand,
the
visual
material
is
more
than
an
accessory,
because
the
pictures
promote
the
text’s
message
on
an
additional
level,
by
drawing
the
reader’s
attention
to
the
text
in
different
ways
and
by
repeatedly
illustrating
the
same
idea,
which
forces
him
to
think
about
the
text
more
in
depth.
In
the
two
texts
mentioned
above,
the
illustrations
included
are
meant
to
represent
the
child’s
point
of
view,
which
allows
the
reader
to
view
the
text
from
a
different
perspective
than
what
the
reader
had
been
imagining
at
the
beginning
of
the
reading
process.
The
following
core
questions
come
to
mind
when
we
come
to
think
of
visual
material
in
fiction:
Does
the
type
of
visual
material
that
an
author
chooses
for
his
novel
depend
on
the
narrator’s
character?
Does
the
visual
material
change
depending
on
the
narrator’s
age
and
function?
And
finally,
does
the
reader
sense
the
author
as
the
selector
of
the
images
or
does
the
reader
feel
as
if
he
is
11
confronted
with
a
child’s
point
of
view?
The
following
research
is
going
to
include
an
analysis
of
the
importance
and
impact
of
visual
material
in
literature.
Apart
from
the
fact
that
I
enjoy
reading
novels
with
child
narrators
that
include
pictures,
there
is
also
the
idea
that
one
premise
for
writing
this
thesis
was
to
discuss
a
literary
topic
that
has
been
devoid
of
overt
analysis
to
date.
The
thesis
at
hand
would
not
merit
the
title
of
research
paper,
if
it
dealt
with
a
literary
aspect
that
has
already
been
widely
covered
and
examined
by
previous
authors.
Critics
and
analysts
have
attributed
little
attention
to
the
function
of
child
narrators
in
adult
literature
up
to
now.
Consequently,
this
field
of
research
offers
the
possibility
for
original
in-‐depth
analysis
and
discussion.
Finally,
apart
from
writing
about
literature,
I
am
primarily
an
English
language
teacher.
So,
to
me
as
an
educator,
it
is
of
interest
to
see,
how
young
people
are
portrayed
in
adult
literature.
Do
some
adults
take
their
cynical
view
of
children
from
the
books
they
read
or
does
literature
disseminate
a
more
positive
portrait
of
the
child?
To
what
extent
can
one
say
that
literature
reflects
the
general
social
attitude
of
the
time,
when
the
novel
was
written?
Additionally,
is
there
such
a
literary
device
as
a
stereotypical
child
narrator,
or
are
all
narrators,
even
if
they
share
the
aspect
that
they
are
children,
completely
different
and
independent
characters?
In
the
end,
I
am
going
to
have
a
look
at
the
complex
idea
if
the
author’s
background
and
social
environment
influence
the
way
he
portrays
his
child
characters.
When
was
the
concept
of
child
character
created
and
what
was
the
corresponding
social
situation
of
the
child
like
at
that
point
in
time?
It
is
clear
that
it
is
my
aim
to
look
at
the
concept
of
child
narrators
from
as
many
different
aspects
as
possible.
Identifying
the
necessary
research
features
and
understanding
them
in
singular
ways
was
one
of
the
envisaged
study
challenges
that
I
need
to
overcome.
At
the
beginning
of
my
analysis,
in
order
to
facilitate
understanding
between
me,
as
the
writer
of
the
present
thesis,
and
my
readers,
I
am
going
to
discuss
and
define
the
concepts
of
‘child,’
‘narrator,’
and
of
‘adult
literature,’
as
I
understand
and
interpret
those
notions.
Yet,
before
I
can
outline
the
key
ideas
of
the
research
paper
at
hand,
I
am
going
to
delineate
the
research
methodology
of
my
thesis
and
grant
my
readers
a
brief
overall
glance
at
the
ideas
to
come.
12
Additionally,
Mark
Haddon
has
decided
that
his
child
narrator
has
Asperger’s
Syndrome.
The
author
can
use
the
narrator’s
level
of
mental
development
and
understanding,
in
order
to
explain
incoherent
or
inconsistent
child
behaviour.
Mark
Haddon’s
character
is
not
meant
to
be
an
authentic
child
character,
because
his
situation
is
different
from
that
of
average
children.
Yet,
since
I
wanted
to
compare,
how
and
to
what
extent
authors
create,
or
want
to
create,
common
child
figures
as
the
narrators
of
their
stories,
I
have
decided
to
opt
for
Jonathan
Safran
Foer’s
novel
and
for
Romain
Gary’s
text.
At
the
onset
of
my
research,
I
wanted
to
include
the
in-‐depth
analysis
of
three
or
four
different
novels,
stretching
over
a
broader
time
period.
However,
analyzing
a
broader
variety
of
novels
would
have
come
at
the
expense
of
thorough
analysis
of
the
two
texts
that
I
have
finally
selected
as
the
basis
for
my
thesis
and
which,
in
my
opinion,
merit
full
concentration.
At
last,
in
order
to
keep
my
research
and
analysis
interesting
for
myself
and
for
the
reader,
I
am
going
to
focus
on
different
social
topics
within
each
book.
The
child
narrators
are
relating
their
lives
and
commenting
on
their
everyday
experiences,
but
at
the
same
time,
the
main
characters
also
uncover
and
portray
more
general
social
issues.
I
am
therefore
going
to
highlight
a
selection
of
central
topics
that
the
child
narrators
stir
up
in
each
novel
and
I
am
going
to
have
a
look
at
the
way
the
child
narrators
expose
and
assimilate
these
social
concerns
in
relation
to
their
childlike
worldview.
The
detailed
analysis
of
the
two
novels
leads
to
a
general
comparison
of
the
discussed
texts,
in
order
to
come
to
a
common
conclusion.
Is
there
such
a
literary
device
as
the
stereotypical
child
narrator
or
do
all
child
characters
differ
according
to
their
authors’
backgrounds
and
literary
style?
I
expect
the
novels’
general
issues
to
differ
greatly,
because
of
the
difference
in
the
authors’
main
social
concerns.
However,
some
fundamental
aspects
of
the
social
problems
that
exist
between
adults
and
children
have
barely
changed
throughout
the
ages.
Consequently,
the
two
novels
might
also
display
similarities.
The
thesis’
conclusion
will
be
a
discussion
of
similarities
and
divergences
in
books
featuring
child
narrators.
Finally,
in
order
to
structure
my
analysis
and
to
include
an
important
aspect
of
21st
century
thinking,
I
have
decided
to
work
with
Edward
de
Bono’s
concept
of
the
‘Six
Thinking
Hats’.
I
am
going
to
look
at
the
idea
of
child
narrators
from
six
14
15
16
Workshop:
Writing
Fiction
–
The
Practical
Guide
from
New
York’s
acclaimed
Creative
Writing
School.
N.Y.:
Bloomsbury.
2003,
78
-‐
Further
references
are
included
in
the
text
(VV).
17
out
the
distinct
problem
generated
by
a
peripheral
narrator,
which
is
the
idea
that
the
peripheral
narrator
observes
and
comments
on
another
character’s
life.
Unless
observer
and
observed
are
identical,
there
is
a
substantial
part
in
the
main
character’s
life
that
the
peripheral
narrator
misses
out
on
and
which
he
is
unable
to
comment
on
or
to
relate
to.
This
lack
of
information
generates
the
risk
that
the
peripheral
narrator
invents
parts
of
the
story,
in
order
to
construct
and
complement
his
own
interpretation
of
the
tale.
In
a
way,
the
reader
urges
the
narrator
to
line
his
story
with
a
continuous
stream
of
information,
or
the
reader
is
left
wondering
what
the
main
character
is
up
to,
when
he
is
unobserved.
Of
course,
the
lack
of
information
brings
about
a
degree
of
suspense
and
opens
up
space
for
the
reader’s
imagination
and
interpretation.
In
that
case,
it
makes
sense
that
the
author
uses
a
peripheral
narrator
if
he
wants
to
challenge
the
reader’s
creative
capacity
and
if
the
author
is
more
concerned
with
the
reader’s
own
interpretation
of
the
story,
than
with
the
transmission
of
a
specific
message.
Additionally,
Valerie
Vogrin
points
out
that
it
also
depends
on
the
‘narrator’s
vantage
point,’
which
information
the
narrator
is
willing
to
transmit.
If
the
peripheral
narrator
wants
to
omit
information,
he
is
in
a
much
more
favourable
situation
to
do
so,
because
the
peripheral
narrator
can
always
argue
that
he
missed
out
on
certain
information
or
that
he
could
not
uninterruptedly
observe
the
story’s
characters.
On
the
other
hand,
the
peripheral
narrator
misses
out
on
a
lot
of
information
anyway,
because
of
his
restricted
outlook
on
the
characters.
So
if
the
narrator
deliberately
cuts
out
even
more
information,
because
he
intends
to
omit
specific
information,
then
the
narrator
needs
to
invent
more,
in
order
to
add
padding
to
his
story.
Elinor
Ochs
adds
that
‘while
differing
in
complexity
and
circumstance,
narratives
transform
life’s
journeys
into
sequences
of
events
and
evoke
shifting
and
enduring
perspectives
on
experience’
(EO
20).
Elinor
Ochs
is
right
when
she
points
out
that
each
narrative
differs
in
complexity,
because
the
level
of
complexity
depends
on
the
constructor
of
the
narrative,
but
also
on
the
receiver’s
receptiveness.
A
single
photograph
is
a
basic
visual
narrative,
which
is
at
first
sight
not
very
complex.
The
photographer
is
the
person,
who
squeezes
the
background
narrative
into
a
condensed
shape.
The
fact
that
a
photograph
is
the
compressed
18
form
of
a
narrative
explains
the
idea
that
the
photograph,
or
basic
narrative,
can
again
be
unpacked
and
reverted
to
its
previous
complexity,
if
necessary,
because
something
that
exists
in
a
restricted
form
can
generally
be
expanded.
Moreover,
a
narrative
manages
to
give
shape
to
an
occurrence
and
to
lastingly
fix
events
and
experiences
in
time.
Yet,
even
if
an
experience
has
been
made,
processed,
captured
and
even
recorded,
then
an
experience
still
remains
fleeting
and
alters
its
shape,
because
people’s
memory
is
unstable
and
the
way
we
interpret
any
experience
depends
on
the
current
mood
we
are
in,
when
we
make
an
experience
and
also
on
the
mood
we
are
in,
when
we
are
revisiting,
discussing
or
analyzing
an
experience.
Additionally,
each
individual
identity
is
shifting
and
fleeting
too,
which
means
that
with
each
identity
a
person
adopts,
his
view
on
the
world
and
his
capacity
for
interpretation
alter
as
well.
In
the
end,
the
interpretation
of
each
experience
is
the
interpretation
of
a
memory
of
that
same
experience.
Consequently,
a
narrative
alters
its
focus,
depending
on
the
narrator’s
current
personal
emphasis.
Yet,
Judith
A.
Howard
explains
that
”identity”
is
a
keyword
of
contemporary
society
and
a
central
focus
of
social
psychological
theorizing
and
research.
At
earlier
historical
moments,
identity
was
not
so
much
an
issue;
when
societies
were
more
stable,
identity
was
to
a
great
extent
assigned,
rather
than
selected
or
adopted.
In
current
times,
however,
the
concept
of
identity
carries
the
full
weight
of
the
need
for
a
sense
of
who
one
is,
together
with
an
often
overwhelming
pace
of
change
in
surrounding
social
contexts.12
Consequently,
people’s
desire
to
define
who
they
essentially
are
brings
about
an
equal
desire
for
self-‐reflection
and
personal
narration.
Thus,
narratives
are
a
modern
way
of
capturing
an
experience
that
would
otherwise
have
been
lost
for
future
comparison
and
analysis.
Each
individual
turns
into
the
narrator
of
his
own
story
and
at
times,
this
narrator
is
peripheral,
because
as
far
as
the
people
surrounding
the
self
are
concerned,
each
individual
can
only
observe
the
surrounding
actions,
but
is
denied
full
control.
Moreover,
in
terms
of
narrator
types,
M.H.
Abrams
additionally
identifies
the
third-‐person
narrator
as
a
common
literary
device,
which
is
a
slight
variation
12
Howard,
Judith
A.
“Social
Psychology
of
Identities.”
Annual
Review
of
Sociology
26
(2000):
367-‐
393,
367.
19
from
the
peripheral
narrator:
‘in
a
third-‐person
narrative,
the
narrator
is
someone
outside
the
story
proper
who
refers
to
all
the
characters
in
the
story
by
name,
or
as
“he,”
“she,”
and
“they.”’13
Furthermore,
the
third-‐person
narrator
is
commonly
omniscient,
which
accounts
for
the
difference
between
peripheral
and
third-‐
person
narrator.
M.H.
Abrams
suggests
that
the
third-‐person
narrator
is
the
‘intrusive
narrator
[;
the
one]
who
not
only
reports,
but
also
comments
on
and
evaluates
the
actions
and
motives
of
the
characters,
and
sometimes
expresses
personal
views
about
human
life
in
general’
(MHA
232).
M.H.
Abrams’
statement
indicates
that
evaluating
and
commenting
on
events
in
a
story
is
an
exclusive
device,
which
is
reserved
for
the
third-‐person
narrator.
However,
any
narrator
comments
on
and
evaluates
the
events
and
characters
in
a
story.
The
peripheral
narrator,
for
example,
is
meant
to
remain
without
commenting
on
the
main
character’s
feelings
and
emotions,
because
he
does
not
know
about
them.
Yet,
the
impossibility
to
comment
is
also
a
statement
in
itself:
the
fact
that
the
peripheral
narrator
may
be
absent
during
important
events
in
the
story
indicates
that
the
characters
prefer
to
remain
unobserved
in
certain
situations,
which
leads
the
reader
to
come
to
a
personal
conclusion.
In
this
scenario,
the
peripheral
narrator
unintentionally
evaluates
the
characters’
attitude
and
behaviour.
M.H.
Abrams
continues
to
say
that
‘most
works
are
written
according
to
the
convention
that
the
omniscient
narrator’s
reports
and
judgments
are
to
be
taken
as
authoritative
by
the
reader,
and
so
serve
to
establish
what
counts
as
true
facts
and
values
within
the
fictional
world’
(MHA
232).
On
a
first
level,
the
reader
needs
to
take
every
narrator’s
testimony
at
face
value,
because
that
report
is
the
only
information
that
the
reader
has.
Yet,
as
the
story
progresses,
the
reader
consciously
or
unconsciously
constructs
his
own
opinion
in
relation
to
the
story’s
development
and
to
the
characters’
behaviour
and
attitude.
What
the
narrator
relates
to
is
his
individual
truth
and
own
perception
of
the
events
at
hand.
Still,
the
reader
is
in
the
position
to
assemble
his
own
interpretation
of
the
displayed,
so
called,
facts.
In
his
conclusions,
M.H.
Abrams
acknowledges
that
‘the
omniscient
narrator
may
choose
to
be
unintrusive’
(MHA
232),
which
means
that
the
omniscient
13
Abrams,
M.H.
A
Glossary
of
Literary
Terms
(7th
edition).
Boston:
Heinle
&
Heinle.
1999,
232
–
narrator
may
chose
to
relate
the
facts
without
any
judgment.
In
that
case,
the
third-‐person
narrator
can
provide
the
reader
with
more
detailed
information
than
the
peripheral
narrator,
but
the
problem
of
the
information
that
remains
detained
stays
the
same
as
in
the
case
of
the
peripheral
narrator:
those
things
that
remain
uncommented
speak
for
themselves
and
guide
the
reader’s
judgment,
whether
that
is
the
author’s
or
the
character’s
primary
intention
or
not.
Whereas
the
peripheral
narrator
observes
and
comments
on
what
he
actually
witnesses,
the
third-‐person
narrator
is
on
top
of
what
is
going
on
in
the
story
and
is
informed
or
supposed
to
be
clued-‐up.
Yet,
whether
the
narrator
imparts
his
knowledge
and
shares
his
observations
with
the
reader
or
not,
remains
up
to
the
narrator.
Here
we
can
mention
Valérie
Vogrin’s
comment
again
which
says
that
it
depends
on
the
narrator’s
‘vantage
point,’
which
information
he
shares
with
the
reader
and
which
light
he
sheds
on
the
story’s
events.
Having
a
child
character
as
third-‐person
narrator
or
as
peripheral
narrator
is
more
challenging
for
the
reader
than
being
faced
with
an
adult
narrator.
The
child
narrator
relates
the
facts
differently
than
an
adult,
because
a
child’s
focal
points
or
interests
differ
from
that
of
grown-‐ups.
When
a
story
has
a
peripheral
child
narrator,
then
the
reader
needs
to
convert
the
narrator’s
child
reality
into
an
adult
truth.
Of
course,
the
author
could
also
render
the
child
more
mature
and
put
the
words
of
a
grown-‐up
into
his
narrator’s
mouth.
However,
in
that
case,
the
peripheral
narrator
becomes
a
third-‐person
narrator,
who
is
involved
in
the
story,
because
he
has
the
ability
to
comment
on
the
story.
This
association
takes
away
the
narrator’s
position
as
mere
observer
and
draws
the
character
into
the
focal
point
of
the
reader’s
attention,
because
the
reader
instinctively
wants
to
compare
his
interpretation
of
the
characters’
behaviour
to
someone
else’s,
even
if
it
is
just
the
narrator’s
understanding
of
the
story.
Another
literary
device,
which
is
crucial
for
our
thesis
at
hand,
is
the
first-‐
person
narrator.
When
the
author
selects
a
first-‐person
narrator,
the
story
turns
into
a
‘narrative
of
self-‐interest,’
where
the
narrator
focuses
on
his
own
life-‐story
and
makes
his
existence
the
subject
of
interest
for
a
whole
readership.
M.H.
Abrams
explains
that
‘in
a
first-‐person
narrative,
the
narrator
speaks
as
“I”’
(MHA
21
231). He is the ‘reader’s means of perception’14 and the central character of the
story.
In
a
novel
with
a
first-‐person
narrator,
the
main
character
develops
his
experience
in
and
understanding
of
life,
as
described
in
the
novel,
simultaneously
with
the
reader.
In
this
case
the
stream-‐of-‐consciousness
technique,
‘in
which
we
are
presented
with
outer
observations
only
as
they
impinge
on
the
continuous
current
of
thought,
memory,
feelings,
and
associations
which
constitute
a
particular
observer’s
total
awareness’
(MHA
233),
comes
to
play
a
role.
The
reader
sees
and
feels
simultaneously
with
the
narrator.
Each
observation
furthers
the
narrator’s
and
the
reader’s
understanding
of
the
incidents
in
the
novel
and
in
the
lives
of
the
characters.
There
are
outer
observations
that
the
narrator
comments
on,
but
there
are
also
other
events
that
happen
at
the
same
time
as
the
observed
event,
but
which
remain
unnoticed
or
uncommented.
Yet,
these
undisputed
incidents
contribute
to
the
later
development
of
the
story
nevertheless,
even
if
the
narrator
does
not
want
to
discuss
them.
On
the
other
hand,
the
narrator
can
refrain
from
discussing
additional
events,
because
they
are
especially
important
for
the
later
development
of
the
story.
Even
a
first
person
narrator
chooses,
which
elements
or
events
he
wants
to
integrate
in
his
story
and
which
he
wants
to
leave
undiscussed.
Before
we
have
said
that
the
reader
develops
his
understanding
of
the
story
simultaneously
with
the
narrator.
However,
what
the
first-‐person
narrator
tells
the
reader
is
only
a
selection
of
the
things,
people,
and
experiences
the
narrator
makes.
Thus,
the
narrator
remains
in
a
superior
position
in
relation
to
the
reader,
at
least
in
terms
of
the
information
he
can
access
and
process.
Having
pointed
out
the
different
roles
and
situations
of
the
narrator,
we
need
to
stress
that
the
narrator
or
the
central
character
plays
a
crucial
role
in
the
attraction
that
a
text
exerts
on
its
readers.
The
narrator’s
likeability
renders
the
novel
a
success
or
a
failure.
Vogrin
Valerie
points
out
that
‘more
than
anything
else,
the
point
of
view
you
choose
for
your
story
or
novel
will
affect
the
way
the
readers
respond
emotionally
to
your
characters
and
their
actions’
(AS
p.77).
The
appreciation
and
sympathy
between
narrator
and
reader
depends
on
the
narrator’s
and
also
on
the
reader’s
character.
Either
the
narrator
is
completely
14
Steele,
Alexander.
Gotham
Writer’s
Workshop:
Writing
Fiction
–
The
Practical
Guide
from
New
York’s
acclaimed
Creative
Writing
School.
N.Y.:
Bloomsbury.
2003,
79
–
Further
references
are
included
in
the
text
(AS).
22
different
from
the
reader
in
attitude
and
style,
then
the
reader
might
want
to
listen
to
the
narrator
in
order
to
be
confronted
with
a
world
view
that
completely
different
to
his
own;
or
a
narrator
operates
on
the
same
wavelength
as
the
reader.
In
that
case
the
reader-‐narrator-‐relationship
can
also
be
a
success,
because
the
reader
finds
it
comfortable
to
follow
the
reading
process,
since
the
discussed
challenges
and
emotions
are
familiar
to
him.
Helena
Schneider
sums
up
that
die
Autentizität
personalen
Erzählverhaltens
hat
darüber
hinaus
einen
ganz
bestimmten
Effekt
auf
den
Leser.
Je
besser
dieser
nämlich
über
das
Innenleben
einer
Figur
Bescheid
weiss
und
je
echter
diese
Gefühls-‐
und
Gedankenwelt
auf
ihn
wirkt,
desto
grösser
ist
aller
Wahrscheinlichkeit
nach
auch
seine
Sympathie
für
die
jeweilige
Figur
sowie
das
Verständnis,
das
er
dieser
entgegenbringt.15
The
narrator’s
likeability
depends
on
the
one
hand,
on
the
character’s
closeness
or
distance
to
the
reader.
Yet,
Helena
Schneider
argues
that
on
the
other
hand,
the
effect
the
narrator
creates
also
depends
on
the
character’s
authenticity.
The
more
coherent
a
character
is
in
his
actions
and
assertions,
the
better
a
reader
receives
him.
This
reaction
is
only
natural,
since
the
reader
wants
to
identify
with
the
narrator
and
to
understand
his
evolution.
So,
if
the
narrator
is
a
person
of
integrity,
then
the
reader
feels
closer
to
the
narrator,
because
the
narrator
becomes
a
predictable
figure
and
the
reader
can
understand
him
more
easily.
In
contrast,
even
if
the
narrator
remains
unpredictable,
then
the
reader
can
accept
this
situation,
if
the
narrator
is
consistently
unpredictable.
The
narrator’s
predictability
allows
the
reader
to
get
closely
involved
in
the
story
and
to
start
guessing
beforehand,
how
the
narrative
will
continue.
The
narrator’s
unpredictability
renders
the
novel
attractive
to
the
reader,
because
the
narrator
nourishes
a
certain
level
of
suspense
all
throughout
the
story.
Consequently,
the
two,
a
narrator’s
predictability
or
unpredictability,
render
the
narrator
likeable,
as
long
as
the
narrator
is
consistent
in
his
approach
or
in
his
self-‐portrayal.
Alexander
Chester
defines
sympathy
as
‘a
sharing
of
the
joy
or
sorrow
that
another
feels.
At
least
it
leads
to
an
understanding
of
the
other
and
consequently
tends
to
bring
personalities
into
closer
social
interaction.’16
On
the
one
hand,
15
Schneider,
Helena.
Harper
Lee
“To
Kill
a
Mockingbird”
(1960)
–
Die
Perspektive
des
Kindes.
Nordherderstedt:
GRIN
Verlag.
2004,
43
–
Further
references
are
included
in
the
text
(HS).
16
Chester,
Alexander.
“Antipathy
and
Social
Behavior.”
The
American
Journal
of
Sociology
51.4
(Jan.
Alexander
Chester
is
right,
because
each
confrontation
between
characters
brings
those
people
intentionally
or
unintentionally
closer
together.
Yet,
if
a
person
feels
sympathy
when
dealing
with
the
sorrows
of
another
person,
then
this
initial
positive
sharing
of
emotions
can
also
turn
into
a
feeling
of
superiority.
When
a
novel’s
character
is
in
distress,
then
the
reader
can
feel
sympathy
on
the
one
hand,
yet
he
can
also
experience
a
feeling
of
superior
joy,
because
he
remains
unattained
by
the
character’s
suffering.
Of
course,
in
the
end,
the
two
situations,
a
feeling
of
superiority
or
genuine
sympathy,
can
lead
to
the
reader
being
positively
attracted
to
the
narrator
or
main
character,
because
reader
and
narrator
have
shared
or
witnessed
a
common
experience
that
links
them
together.
In
contrast,
Sophie
Bryant
argues
that
there
is
a
pseudo-‐sympathy
which
consists
in
the
arbitrary
projection
of
one’s
own
joys,
sorrows,
and
virtues
into
another
mind,
[…]
Similarly,
there
is
a
pseudo-‐
antipathy,
[when]
we
ascribe
[to
the
narrator
or
character]
our
own
defects,
and,
in
proportion
as
we
abhor
them,
the
abhorrence
is
transferred
to
him.17
What
Sophie
Bryant
means
is
that
the
reader
manages
to
understand
the
narrator
the
way
he
wants
to
understand
him.
The
narrator
becomes
what
the
reader
wants
him
to
be.
When
the
reader
is
in
a
provocative
mood,
then
challenging
the
narrator’s
reality
and
way
of
expressions
turns
into
the
reader’s
focal
point.
Additionally,
if
the
reader
finds
it
hard
to
come
to
terms
with
certain
personal
character
traits,
then
the
reader
more
readily
notices
these
features
in
a
novel’s
characters
or
in
the
narrator.
Sophie
Bryant
argues
that
there
is
a
growing
antipathy,
if
a
figure
displays
character
traits
that
one
personally
rejects.
Yet,
growing
sympathy
between
reader
and
character
can
also
result
out
of
initial
rejection,
because
the
reader
learns
how
to
handle
challenging
character
traits,
by
observing
or
reading
about
other
people
dealing
with
personal
shortcomings.
Moreover,
the
narrator’s
tone
of
voice
triggers
the
reader’s
sympathy
for
the
novel’s
characters.
The
stories
we
are
going
to
analyze
are
narrated
by
child
characters
and
accordingly,
we
assume
that
the
tone
of
voice
in
these
novels
is
childlike
or
even
childish.
However,
we
need
to
keep
in
mind
that
the
narrator
is
only
the
puppet
and
that
the
writer
is
the
puppeteer,
who
breathes
life
into
his
characters
and
who
moulds
them.
Consequently,
it
is
the
writer’s
understanding
of
17
Bryant,
Sophie.
“Antipathy
and
Sympathy.”
Mind,
New
Series
4.15
(Jul.
1895):
365-‐370,
365.
24
a
child
narrator,
which
defines
if
the
precocious
narrator
speaks
with
a
childlike
or
childish
tone
of
voice
or
if
the
child
narrator
adopts
a
more
mature
way
of
expression.
In
later
chapters,
we
are
going
to
analyze
the
advantages
and
disadvantages
of
either
above-‐mentioned
procedure.
Why
choose
a
child
character
with
a
mature
tone
of
voice?
Why
not
an
adult
narrator
with
a
childlike
tone
of
voice
or
vice-‐versa?
It
is
a
fact
though
that
the
reader
expects
a
certain
tone
of
voice
in
relation
to
a
certain
type
of
narrator:
a
fifty
year
old
protagonist
is
supposed
to
sound
different
from
a
child
narrator;
a
female
narrator
different
from
a
male
narrator.
Yet,
these
expectations
of
idiosyncrasy
have
been
formed
by
the
reader’s
personal
previous
experiences,
fictional
or
real.
If
we
have
just
read
books
by
precocious
narrators,
who
talk
like
adults,
then
we
will
not
expect
child
narrators
to
have
limited
vocabulary
resources
and
to
concoct
imaginary
worlds.
Though,
if
the
reader
has
not
had
any
previous
experience,
then
childish
behaviour
and
a
self-‐
indulgent
tone
of
voice
are
the
stereotypical
expectations
that
the
reader
has
in
mind.
Furthermore,
Therese
Fischer
argues
that
the
narrator
can
be
described
in
terms
of
the
distance
he
holds
to
the
author,
[to
the]
reader,
and
to
[the]
other
fictional
characters.
The
distance
can
be
moral,
intellectual,
physical
(temporal,
spatial),
and
emotional,
and
can
vary
in
degree
from
identification
to
opposition.18
In
the
novels
I
am
going
to
analyze,
the
distance
between
reader
and
narrator
adopts
at
first
sight
all
of
the
above-‐mentioned
forms,
assuming
that
the
reader
is
an
adult
and
the
narrator
a
child.
However,
the
distance
between
reader
and
narrator
is
of
flexible
nature
and
varies
throughout
the
story.
First
of
all,
since
the
two
novels
at
the
core
of
my
research
feature
child
narrators,
I
can
say
that
the
children
grow
throughout
the
stories
and
their
understanding
of
the
world
develops
too.
Of
course,
the
intellectual
distance
between
child
narrator
and
reader
remains,
because
the
reader
also
grows
intellectually
by
reading
the
novel
and
by
making
additional
real
life
experiences.
Consequently,
the
reader
stays
18
Fischer,
Therese.
“From
Reliable
to
Unreliable
Narrator:
Rhetorical
Changes
in
Joyce’s
‘The
Sisters.’”
James
Joyce
Quarterly
9.1
(Fall
1971):
85-‐92,
86
–
Further
references
are
included
in
the
text
(TF).
25
intellectually
ahead
of
the
child.
However,
the
child’s
understanding
grows
more
rapidly
than
the
adult
develops
his
worldview,
because
there
is
more
unfamiliar
knowledge
that
a
child
can
assimilate.
The
adult
has
limited
access
to
completely
new
material,
which
he
can
learn
from
and
so,
the
intellectual
space
between
child
narrator
and
adult
reader
remains
established,
but
the
amount
of
distance
shifts
constantly.
Additionally,
the
emotional
distance
between
reader
and
narrator
also
changes,
as
the
reading
process
advances.
Although
the
narrator
is
a
child,
and
by
nature
has
little
in
common
with
the
adult
world,
the
reader
will
identify
more
and
more
with
the
young
narrator
as
time
goes
by.
However,
the
age
of
a
novel’s
character
is
of
secondary
interest,
when
it
comes
to
the
emotional
relationship
the
reader
develops
in
relation
to
the
character.
Each
time
the
reader
picks
up
the
novel,
it
is
as
if
he
returns
to
an
old
friend,
shares
in
and
deals
with
his
friend’s
concerns
and
worries.
In
The
Life
Before
Us,
the
narrator
Momo
says:
‘I
must
have
been
seven
or
eight
at
the
time,
I
can’t
be
exactly
sure
because
I
wasn’t
dated,
as
you’ll
see
when
we’re
better
acquainted
if
you
think
it’s
worth
your
trouble.’19
This
quote
illustrates
that
authors
play
with
the
emotional
distance
between
reader
and
narrator.
In
the
preceding
quote,
Momo
lures
the
reader
into
taking
emotionally
part
in
the
story,
by
appealing
to
the
audience’s
compassion
and
sympathy.
A
child,
who
does
not
know
how
old
it
is,
because
nobody
cares
enough
to
do
research
or
to
tell
him,
appeals
to
the
reader’s
emotions.
The
emotional
relationship
between
reader
and
narrator
gradually
develops,
independently
of
the
narrator’s
age.
Yet,
Momo’s
case
illustrates
that
the
reader
feels
naturally
compelled
to
sympathize
more
readily
with
a
child,
than
with
an
adult,
because
children
appeal
to
the
adult’s
protective
instinct.
Moreover,
Momo
reduces
the
distance
between
himself
and
the
reader,
by
addressing
the
reader
directly.
In
an
additional
passage
Momo
says:
He
came
from
Niger,
which
is
one
of
the
numerous
countries
they’ve
got
in
Africa,
and
he
made
himself,
as
he
kept
telling
us.
“I’m
a
self-‐made
man,”
he’d
say
with
his
suit
and
diamond
rings.
He
had
one
on
each
finger
and
when
he
was
murdered
in
the
Seine
they
cut
off
his
fingers
for
the
rings,
because
it
was
a
settling
of
accounts.
I’m
telling
you
this
right
now
so
as
not
to
upset
you
later
on.
(RG
26)
19
Gary,
Romain
(Emile
Ajar).
The
Life
Before
Us.
New
York:
New
Directions
Books.
1978,
3
–
Further
Momo’s
immediate
address
puts
the
narrator
in
direct
contact
with
the
reader.
The
reader
feels
valorised,
because
individually
spoken
to,
which
diminishes
the
emotional
distance
between
reader
and
narrator.
The
narrator
is
aware
of
his
role
as
a
storyteller,
which
is
positive
on
the
one
hand,
because
Momo
manages
to
involve
the
reader
in
the
narrative.
On
the
other
hand,
as
a
consequence
of
the
narrator’s
openness,
the
reader
starts
to
question,
whether
Momo’s
account
is
based
on
facts,
or
whether
his
account
has
been
embellished,
in
order
to
attract
the
audience’s
attention.
In
relation
to
the
foregoing
discussion,
Vogrin
Valerie
mentions
the
‘unreliable
narrator.’
The
critic
says
that:
in
a
sense,
all
first-‐person
narrators
are
somewhat
unreliable.
Even
the
most
scrupulous
characters
may,
unconsciously
perhaps,
shade
the
truth
or
emphasize
one
fact
over
another
to
make
themselves
look
ever-‐so-‐slightly
better.
[…]
The
narrator’s
unreliability
adds
to
the
story’s
unsettling
effect.
[…]
The
unreliable
narrator
emphasizes
the
fact
that
there
is
no
such
thing
as
a
single,
static,
knowable
reality.
(AS
84/
85)
Vogrin
Valerie
correctly
notes
that
even
the
most
conscientious
storyteller
can
never
narrate
a
story
by
reproducing
the
events
one-‐to-‐one
as
they
actually
occurred,
since
there
is
no
stable
or
factual
reality.
The
narrator’s
current
and
prior
mood
and
his
memory
of
the
events
will
always
alter
the
projection
of
incidents,
from
the
past
into
the
present,
through
narrative.
Mood
and
experience
that
interfere
with
an
accurate
reproduction
of
events
are
natural
or
unconscious
intrusions.
However,
Valerie
Vogrin
also
points
out
that
a
narrator
can
deliberately
alter
a
story,
in
order
to
put
himself
in
a
better
position.
In
the
later
development
of
the
thesis
at
hand,
we
are
going
to
discuss
the
importance
of
narrative
truthfulness
more
in
detail.
Thirdly,
the
moral
distance
between
narrator
and
reader
is
obvious.
Spontaneously,
the
assumption
goes
that
a
child
has
lower
moral
standards
than
an
adult,
because
a
child
has
less
life
experience
to
take
as
reference
point,
in
order
to
evaluate,
what
is
morally
acceptable
in
his
cultural
and
social
context.
In
contrast
though,
children
display
natural
morality
towards
their
environment.
Adult
moral
behaviour
is
tainted
and
influenced
by
their
experiences
and
by
social
conventions
that
dictate
us
how
to
behave
ethically
correct.
Consequently,
27
experience
does
not
serve
the
purpose
of
reference
point,
but
is
a
string
of
singular
incidents
that
have
altered
man’s
natural
compassion
and
moral.
Disappointment,
anger,
aggression
and
rejection,
by
other
human
beings,
change
our
personal
ethical
standard,
whereas
children
naturally
react
in
a
compassionate
and
ethical
way.
Of
course,
perceiving
children
as
inherently
good
is
a
generalized
and
personal
opinion,
yet
one
that
Jean-‐Jacques
Rousseau
shared,
who
argued
that:
all
things
are
as
good
as
their
Creator
made
them,
but
every
thing
degenerates
in
the
hands
of
men.
All
our
customs
are
nothing
but
subjection,
confinement
and
restraint.
Civilized
man
is
born,
lives,
and
dies
in
slavery...
as
long
as
he
wears
the
human
form,
he
is
confined
by
our
institutions.20
Jean-‐Jacques
Rousseau
argues
that
man
‘lives
and
dies
in
slavery.’
Man
certainly
is
a
lifelong
prisoner
of
society’s
conventions,
because
even
if
a
person
decides
to
reject
the
socially
accepted
principles
of
his
time,
then
he
is
still
controlled
by
the
fact
that
he
tries
to
live
according
to
the
norm’s
opposite,
which
is
an
attitude
that
equally
restricts
a
man’s
freedom.
Additionally,
not
just
people
remain
lifelong
prisoners,
but
ideas
and
creations
too.
A
narrator,
for
example,
is
the
author’s
idea
and
the
narrator
always
remains
the
author’s
prisoner,
because
the
author
has
created
him,
understands,
and
portrays
him
in
a
certain
way.
Of
course,
each
reader
interprets
the
narrator
differently
and
thus,
the
reader
allows
the
narrator
to
break
free
from
his
prison.
However,
although
the
reader
frees
the
narrator
from
the
author’s
confinement,
the
reader
renders
the
narrator
anew
prisoner
of
the
reader’s
individual
interpretation.
So,
the
narrator
turns
from
being
the
prisoner
of
one
person’s
imaginary
world
into
being
the
captive
of
another
one’s.
Consequently,
the
narrator,
or
ideas,
can
never
escape
people’s
definition.
Similarly,
people’s
nature
is
also
held
prisoner
by
other
people,
because
each
person
that
we
encounter
in
our
lives
defines
who
we
are.
On
a
first
level,
people
define
us
in
their
minds,
based
on
the
impressions
they
have
of
us.
However,
people
also
genuinely
shape
each
other,
through
their
actions
and
words,
which
lead
to
mutual
influence.
Thus,
it
is
not
just
general
social
conventions
that
20
Kim,
Jocelyn,
Andrew
Wong,
and
Jean
Wong.
“Children
as
Inherently
Good.”
Umich.edu:
http://www.umich.edu/~ece/student_projects/childrens_lit/Children_as_Good.html
28
subject
people
to
slavery,
but
also
individual
attitudes
that
people
harbour
of
each
other
and
that
they
use,
in
order
to
manipulate
each
other.
Moreover,
whether
we
agree
with
Jean-‐Jacques
Rousseau
that
our
social
experiences
shape
our
ethical
sense
or
whether
our
personal
moral
code
is
innate
remains
debatable.
Yet,
one
can
assume
that
the
child
narrator’s
principles
are
different
from
the
reader’s
at
the
beginning
of
the
story,
because
reader
and
narrator
are
different
characters
and
they
stem
from
different
social
backgrounds
and
from
various
upbringing.
The
degree
of
belief
in
his
ethics
and
the
consistency
with
which
the
child
narrator
pursues
his
ideals
in
the
story,
might
lead
to
the
reader’s
adjustment
of
his
own
ethics,
which
decreases
the
moral
distance
between
reader
and
narrator
towards
the
end
of
the
story.
Interesting
to
note
is
that
similar
to
the
intellectual
development
during
the
reading
process,
both
reader
and
narrator
can
also
ethically
grow
in
the
same
direction,
as
the
story
progresses.
Furthermore,
while
the
moral,
emotional
and
intellectual
distance
between
reader
and
narrator
varies
throughout
the
narrative,
the
physical
gap
between
those
two
entities
remains
unaltered.
In
The
Life
Before
Us,
Momo,
an
orphan,
lives
in
post
World
War
II
Paris
in
an
apartment
that
he
shares
with
other
urchins
and
an
ex-‐prostitute,
who
functions
as
substitute
mother
for
Momo
and
the
other
children
in
their
house.
Today’s
readers
can
gather
information
about
that
period
and
if
a
reader
is
really
compassionate
and
sensitive,
he
can
begin
to
emotionally
understand
and
retrace
the
physical
circumstances
and
living
conditions
of
the
time.
Yet,
the
physical
distance
between
reader
and
narrator
remains
barely
unaltered
throughout
the
whole
reading
process.
This
conclusion
sounds
negative
at
first,
because
this
statement
seems
to
point
out
a
lack
produced
by
the
reading
process.
However,
the
physical
distance
between
reader
and
narrator
is
an
asset,
because
the
physical
distance
grants
the
narrator
a
status
of
unattainability
and
of
near
divinity,
because
the
narrator
is
in
a
situation
that
the
reader
will
never
be
able
to
attain.
Consequently,
the
reader
cannot
offensively
question
the
narrator’s
portrayal
of
his
surroundings
and
has
to
take
parts
of
the
narrative
at
face
value,
due
to
spatial
circumstances.
Additionally,
when
the
reader
is
faced
with
the
incapability
to
understand
the
narrator’s
attitude
and
behaviour,
then
the
reader
can
always
fall
back
onto
the
29
explanation
that
he
cannot
relate
to
the
time
and
space
of
the
narrator
and
thus,
is
not
in
the
position
to
judge
or
fully
understand
the
main
character.
The
reader
is
bound
to
lack
understanding.
The
reader’s
awareness
that
he
is
not
meant
to
fully
understand
the
story’s
setting
puts
the
reader
at
ease
and
allows
him
to
come
to
terms
with
the
gaps
in
his
knowledge.
Jonathan
Safran
Foer’s
narrative
Extremely
Loud
&
Incredibly
Close
takes
place
in
contemporary
New
York.
At
first
glance,
the
physical
distance
between
reader
and
narrator
seems
reduced,
because
place
and
physical
circumstances
of
contemporary
N.Y.
are
a
reality
to
the
reader.
But
the
plot
of
the
story,
where
the
child’s
father
dies
in
9/11,
on
the
one
hand,
removes
the
reader
from
the
story,
because
the
character’s
setting
is
different
from
that
of
most
people,
even
from
that
of
most
New
Yorkers.
In
this
case,
the
novel’s
physical
and
emotional
dimensions
merge,
because
the
more
physical
distance
there
is
between
reader
and
narrator,
the
more
emotional
distance
is
also
created.
Of
course,
the
reader
can
feel
emotionally
close
to
the
narrator,
because
he
feels
compassion
for
a
child,
who
has
lost
his
father.
Yet,
this
emotional
distance
simultaneously
increases,
when
the
reader
cannot
really
understand
the
full
emotional
scope
of
the
narrator’s
world,
because
he
has
never
experienced
a
similar
situation,
like
losing
a
person
in
a
terrorist
attack.
In
conclusion,
during
the
reading
process
there
is
a
constant
shift
between
moral,
intellectual,
physical
and
emotional
distance,
between
reader
and
narrator,
varying
from
a
situation
where
the
reader
closely
identifies
with
the
narrator
to
adopting
the
position
where
the
reader
stands
in
complete
contrast
to
the
narrator.
The
following
thesis
will
analyze
more
in
detail
to
what
extent
a
child
narrator
influences
these
levels
of
distance
more
than
an
adult
narrator
and
which
advantages,
or
disadvantages,
can
result
from
these
constellations.
Finally,
Therese
Fischer
argues
that
”rhetoric”
[…]
includes
all
means
by
which
the
author
of
fiction
influences
his
readers.
One
of
those
means
can
be
a
personal
narrator
who
tells
the
reader
a
story
from
his
subjective
point
of
view
–
not
necessarily
identical
with
that
of
the
author.
But
the
author
can
make
the
fictional
reality
he
presents
appear
also
less
subjective.
He
may
confront
us
with
‘objective’
scenes,
i.e.
dialogues
with
short
neutral
descriptions
and
summaries.
(TF
85)
30
Therese
Fischer’s
argument
indicates
that
the
narrator’s
point
of
view
and
his
descriptions
are
rectified
by
the
author’s
subtle
touch.
The
author
is
the
creator
of
his
storyteller
and
thus,
should
bestow
his
puppet
with
the
necessary
attitude
and
dialogues,
in
order
to
get
his
literary
message
across,
without
ulterior
interference
in
the
story.
However,
what
Therese
Fischer
means
is
that
the
author
can
include
other
characters’
dialogues
in
order
to
make
it
clear
to
the
reader
that
the
narrator’s
point
of
view
is
only
one,
amongst
many,
and
that
the
narrator’s
perspective
is
not
the
norm.
If
the
narrator
relates
the
incidents
in
the
novel
the
way
he
sees
them,
he
relies
on
tone
of
voice
and
behaviour
of
the
other
characters,
in
order
to
formulate
his
observations
and
his
response
to
the
other
characters.
However,
the
narrator’s
interpretation
of
and
reaction
to
the
other
characters
is
his
personal
vantage
point
and
another
narrator
would
react
differently
to
the
situation.
In
this
case,
the
author
also
defines
the
way
in
which
his
character
reacts,
because
he
wants
to
produce
a
specific
narrative
effect.
If
the
author
wants
the
reader
to
readjust
his
evaluation
of
the
narrator’s
point
of
view
and
thus,
introduces
dialogues
as
a
technique
to
allow
other
characters
to
voice
their
opinion
and
perspective
on
the
scene,
then
the
interpretation
of
those
scenes
depends
on
the
reader
and
alters
from
one
reader
to
another.
Moreover,
an
author
cannot
rely
on
dialogues
to
give
the
reader
a
chance
to
evaluate
the
narrator’s
narrative
truthfulness,
because
dialogues
are
not
neutral
indicators
of
reality
either.
The
reader
can
only
guess
the
tone
of
the
dialogue
by
interpreting
the
characters’
reactions.
However,
like
in
real
life,
the
characters
can
misinterpret
tone
of
voice
and
react
in
an
inappropriate
way.
Elinor
Ochs
comments:
narratives
are
versions
of
reality.
They
are
embodiments
of
one
or
more
points
of
view
rather
than
objective,
omniscient
accounts.
While
narrators
emphasize
the
truth
of
a
narrated
text,
others
grapple
with
the
fragility
of
memory
and
the
relativity
of
point
of
view.
[…]
“the
struggle
of
man
against
power
is
the
struggle
of
memory
against
forgetting,”
[yet,]
memory
never
captures
authentic
experience.
“We
immediately
transform
the
present
moment
into
abstraction.
We
need
only
recount
an
episode
we
experienced
a
few
hours
ago:
the
dialogue
contracts
to
a
brief
summary,
the
setting
to
a
few
general
feature
…
Remembering
is
not
the
negative
of
forgetting.
Remembering
is
a
form
of
forgetting.”
An
important
challenge
to
humanity
is
to
recognize
that
lives
are
the
past
we
tell
ourselves.
(EO
21)
31
Narratives
are
only
versions
of
reality,
but
they
are
presented
as
personalized,
individual
truths.
The
reader
can
adopt
the
text
or
narrative
at
face
value,
or
try
to
read
between
the
lines.
Yet,
there
is
lurking
danger
that
the
reader
interprets
too
much
and
that
he
grapples
with
messages
that
the
author
or
the
narrator
did
not
intend
to
transmit.
Then
again,
we
can
ask
the
question
if
a
reader
can
ever
interpret
too
much
and
draw
or
extract
too
much
information
from
a
text.
The
reading
process
allows
the
reader
to
make
sense
of
his
own
reality
and
if
a
text
represents
a
completely
different
reality
and
speaks
of
a
completely
different
truth
to
him
than
what
the
author
intended
or
what
other
readers
make
of
the
text’s
message,
then
it
is
perfectly
legitimate
if
the
reading
process
triggers
a
level
of
understanding
that
allows
the
reader
to
personally
develop
and
to
move
on
in
his
understanding
of
the
world.
In
the
end,
it
is
only
a
mixture
of
the
narrator’s
interpretation,
of
the
reader’s
understanding
of
the
narrator’s
and
of
the
other’s
characters’
attitudes,
which
helps
the
reader
to
unravel
a
story
and
to
make
sense
of
it.
The
foregoing
discussion
indicates
that
the
reading
process
and
the
reader-‐narrator-‐relationship
is
a
spiral,
the
outcome
of
whose
burble
is
a
personalized
reality,
for
each
reader.
According
to
Elinor
Ochs,
‘narratives
are
tales
that
tellers
and
listeners
map
onto
tellings
of
personal
experience.
In
this
sense,
even
the
most
silent
of
listeners
is
an
author
of
an
emerging
narrative’
(EO
21).
The
reader
reshapes
and
reconstructs
the
narrative
and
moulds
it
to
suit
his
own
longing
and
experience.
A
reader
can
shape
and
interpret
the
same
text
in
different
ways
in
order
to
cater
for
different
needs.
In
conclusion,
the
narrator’s
shape
and
function
in
a
novel
depend,
on
the
one
hand,
on
the
author’s
intention
and
his
understanding
of
the
narrator
he
has
created.
On
the
other
hand,
the
definition
of
the
narrator
also
depends
on
the
reader’s
understanding,
interpretation
and
background
experience.
32
in
Manchester
in
1859.’21
This
fact
highlights
the
inferior
role
of
children
in
the
past.
Instead
of
focusing
on
play,
young
people,
as
soon
as
their
muscles
allowed
them
more
or
less
decent
physical
activity,
needed
to
work
in
order
to
support
their
family
financially
and
to
secure
their
future.
Children
were
seen
as
miniature
adults,
who
during
the
Industrial
Revolution
had
to
work
in
factories,
which
exploited
them
more
than
their
farming
families
before
the
economical
change.
According
to
research,
recognition
of
childhood
as
a
state
different
from
adulthood
began
to
emerge
in
the
16th
and
17th
centuries.
Society
began
to
relate
to
the
child
not
as
a
miniature
adult
but
as
a
person
of
a
lower
level
of
maturity
needing
adult
protection,
love
and
nurturing.
This
change
can
be
traced
in
painting:
In
the
Middle
Ages,
children
were
portrayed
in
art
as
miniature
adults
with
no
childish
characteristics.
In
the
16th
century,
images
of
children
began
to
acquire
a
distinct
childish
appearance.
From
the
late
17th
century
onwards,
children
were
shown
playing.
Toys
and
literature
for
children
also
began
to
develop
at
this
time.22
However,
according
to
Tim
Lambert,
it
took
society
until
the
19th
century
to
build
a
children’s
playground,
as
explained
above.
Thus,
public
consciousness
about
the
child’s
status
in
society
and
about
the
child’s
needs
started
to
change,
but
only
sluggishly.
The
change
in
the
elders’
attitude
towards
children
was
related
to
the
growing
financial
security,
furthered
by
the
industrial
revolution.
During
the
time
preceding
the
economical
upraise,
families
had
to
concentrate
on
their
day-‐to-‐day
organization,
instead
of
focusing
on
their
children’s
psychological
development.
Consequently,
painters
visually
representing
children
with
grown
up
features
mirror
the
past
need
for
young
people
to
act
like
adults,
because
of
their
social
circumstances.
Nowadays,
experts
focus
on
and
study
the
most
adapted
psychological
interaction
with
a
child,
but
anew
adults
have
to
focus
more
on
financial
security
than
on
childcare,
because
the
cost
of
people’s
daily
life
has
risen
due
to
high
lease
price
and
expensive
nutrition.
In
a
way,
the
focus
on
the
child’s
wellbeing
has
launched
a
spiral
that
pushes
adults
to
concentrate
more
on
finance,
than
on
the
child’s
world.
Nutritionists,
for
example,
advise
how
to
feed
a
child
a
balanced
diet,
in
order
to
further
his
optimal
physical
and
intellectual
growth.
Yet,
the
cost
for
appropriate
care,
according
to
experts
and
to
research,
needs
to
be
21
Lambert,
Tim.
“A
Brief
History
of
Children.”
Localhistories.org:
http://www.localhistories.org/children.html.
22
Wikipedia.
“Child.”
Wikipedia.org:
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Child.
34
financed,
which
demands
parents
to
take
up
well-‐paid,
but
time
and
energy-‐
consuming
jobs;
time
and
energy
they
consequently
fall
short
of
spending
with
their
children.
Nowadays,
the
stress
on
finance
is
a
different
one
than
in
the
past,
because
in
our
time,
parents
aim
for
more
than
survival;
parents
want
to
cater
for
their
children’s
maximum
and
ideal
development,
but
the
need
to
earn
money
is
still
the
reason
that
diverts
the
parents’
attention
away
from
the
child.
So,
in
a
way
people
nowadays
pretend
that
they
work
for
their
children’s
wellbeing,
which
they
do,
because
they
accommodate
the
children’s
needs,
according
to
the
current
expert
advice
and
common
social
standard,
but
in
fact
this
statement
is
pretentious,
because
parents
nowadays
spend
as
little
or
even
less
quality
time
with
their
offspring
than
100
or
200
years
ago.
According
to
D.D.
Bielby,
among
all
families,
the
proportion
of
dual-‐earner
couples
has
nearly
doubled
since
1960-‐to
about
55%.
Meanwhile,
the
traditional
family
form
of
a
married
couple
with
children
and
with
the
wife
not
in
paid
labor
force
has
declined
to
just
15%.
Over
the
same
period,
women’s
continuous
participation
in
the
paid
labor
force
has
risen,
particularly
among
mothers
of
young
children;
gender
differences
in
levels
of
education
have
declined;
and
the
sex
role
attitudes
of
both
men
and
women
have
become
more
egalitarian.23
Of
course,
on
the
one
hand,
there
is
a
set
of
advantages
that
a
family
fosters,
when
both
parents
earn
the
household
money.
For
one,
feminist
efforts
have
finally
started
to
gradually
pay
off
and
lead
to
an
egalitarian
lifestyle,
for
both,
men
and
women.
Of
course,
there
is
still
a
discrepancy
in
the
amount
of
money,
men
and
women
are
paid
for
accomplishing
the
same
kind
of
jobs,
and
according
to
D.D.
Bielby,
specifically,
women
allow
(and
are
permitted
to
allow)
family
tasks
and
responsibilities
to
intrude
on
their
paid
work,
but
men
are
less
inclined
to
do
so.
Men,
in
contrast,
allow
(and
are
permitted
to
allow)
work
to
intrude
on
family
time.
Men
posits
the
work-‐family
connection
as
a
system
of
exchange
of
personal
resources
including
commitment,
skills,
and
energies,
in
return
for
economic
security,
status,
and
a
sense
of
purpose
and
identity.
(DDB
289)
D.D.
Bielby’s
statement
highlights
the
discrepancy
between
men
and
women
in
terms
of
work
related
attitude,
but
that
topic
is
a
completely
different
matter,
fit
for
discussion
in
later
thesis.
Yet,
what
we
can
say
is
that
positively,
nowadays,
23
Bielby,
D.D.
“Commitment
to
Work
and
Family.”
Annual
Review
of
Sociology
18
(1992):
281-‐302,
women
are
at
least
allowed
to
pursue
the
jobs
and
lead
the
lives
that
suit
their
interests
best.
In
relation
to
the
child’s
world,
we
can
say
that
if
the
parents
are
satisfied
with
their
daily
effort,
the
children
also
benefit
from
the
parents’
balanced
frame
of
mind,
when
the
family
needs
to
interact,
or
when
shared
decisions
need
to
be
taken.
On
the
other
hand,
pursuing
a
job
is
demanding
and
the
employee
cannot
take
a
break,
whenever
he
or
she
feels
like
it,
whereas
mothers,
who
work
as
housewives,
can
relax
at
least
for
a
short
amount
of
time,
when
the
children
are
at
school.
The
women’s
public
job
demands
them
though
to
be
constantly
present
and
alert
all
the
time.
This
amount
of
pressure
leads
to
the
parents’
or
the
mother’s
exhaustion,
which
is
less
furthering
for
the
relationship
between
the
parents
as
a
couple
and
puts
a
strain
on
the
relationship
between
parents
and
children.
In
that
respect,
children
nowadays
need
to
learn
at
a
much
younger
age,
how
to
respect
that
their
parents
have
a
work
life
and
also
a
private
life
that
they
are
not
necessarily
part
of
and
that
their
parents
need
time
to
recover
from
their
daily
effort.
Of
course,
in
the
past,
parents
used
to
work
hard
on
the
farms
for
long
hours
each
day.
At
the
time,
the
children’s
needs
and
their
craving
for
attention
also
came
second,
after
the
work
had
been
done.
Yet,
I
believe
that
it
is
harder
for
children
nowadays
to
understand
their
parents’
effort
at
work,
because
work
is
removed
from
home.
In
the
past,
the
children
could
observe
their
parents
at
work
and
had
to
share
in
their
labour,
which
made
the
children
learn
the
hard
way,
why
their
parents
were
too
tired
in
the
evening,
to
share
in
their
play.
Nowadays,
children
are
more
protected
and
middle-‐class
families
employ
cleaning
ladies,
who
take
care
of
the
household.
On
the
one
hand,
the
mother’s
absence
requires
extra
support
and
the
family
can
afford
the
extra
expense,
because
the
mother
is
also
working.
Yet,
the
consequence
is
that
children
often
ignore
what
‘work’
means
or
implies
and
thus,
children
find
it
challenging
to
understand
that
their
parents
react
irritated
at
times,
when
there
seems
to
be
no
apparent
or
immediate
reason.
Additionally,
the
reason
why
more
women
need
to
go
to
work
nowadays,
than
in
the
past,
is
the
fact
that
there
are
a
greater
number
of
single
parent
households,
than
fifty
years
ago.
Consequently,
on
the
one
hand
the
rise
in
the
number
of
working
women
testifies
of
equality
in
status
between
sexes.
Yet,
36
women
who
need
to
work
also
points
out
that
family
structures
are
currently
rearranging,
which
also
leads
to
a
child
that
needs
to
emotionally
grow
up
much
faster
than
in
the
past,
because
the
child
also
tends
to
adopt
the
role
of
the
missing
partner,
in
terms
of
moral
and
emotional
support.
Of
course,
the
foregoing
discussion
is
based
on
modern
middle-‐class
families,
who
can
afford
such
luxuries
as
a
cleaning
lady.
I
am
aware
that
I
am
talking
in
terms
of
clichés.
Yet,
in
conclusion,
I
do
believe
that
in
the
past,
children
had
to
grow
up
physically
and
emotionally,
because
their
parents
could
not
afford
the
luxury
to
pamper
their
offspring
with
time
and
money.
And
still,
nowadays
children
have
to
grow
up
emotionally,
because
young
people
need
to
deal
with
their
parents’
(emotional
and
physical)
absence
and
their
effort
to
earn
money.
Positive
though
is
that
nowadays,
the
dichotomy
between
rich
and
poor
does
not
lead
to
such
vast
differences
in
children’s
social
roles
anymore,
than
in
the
past,
since
in
Europe,
children
of
almost
all
social
classes
have
access
to
basic
educational
standard
and
to
support
by
the
government.
However,
while
nowadays
children
are
much
more
socially
and
physically
protected
than
some
centuries
ago,
we
have
to
say
that
their
psyche
had
to
painfully
adapt
in
different
ways.
It
is
dismissed
as
a
cliché,
but
nowadays,
children
are
not
children
anymore
in
the
sense
that
their
worldview
is
much
more
influenced
by
an
adult
way
of
thinking.
In
the
old
days,
children
were
sent
out,
when
the
grown-‐ups
were
discussing
serious
matters
or
topics
unfit
for
children’s
ears,
like
sexual
debates
or
financial
concerns.
A
child
had
to
take
guesses
at
the
adults’
secrets
and
construct
his
understanding
and
reality,
by
patching
together
the
bits
and
bobs
of
conversations
he
could
gather.
Of
course,
this
secrecy
led
to
misunderstanding,
to
taking
children
for
fools
and
often
to
the
child’s
personal
painful
discovery
of
the
truth,
which
could
have
been
prevented,
by
the
adults
simply
revealing
reality.
Yet,
secrecy
encouraged
the
young
people’s
creativity.
Nowadays,
children
have
access
to
all
kinds
of
information,
even
if
they
live
in
socially
challenged
circumstances.
In
The
Life
Before
Us,
by
Romain
Gary,
the
protagonist
observes:
‘I
stopped
outside
a
movie,
but
this
picture
didn’t
admit
minors.
It’s
a
laugh
when
you
think
of
the
things
minors
aren’t
allowed
to
see
and
all
the
other
stuff
they
are’
(RG
149).
Romain
Gary’s
character
lives
in
an
even
more
exaggerated
social
reality
than
the
average
37
child,
but
it
is
accurate
that
modern
children
are
exposed
to
and
share
the
same
reality
as
adults.
Additionally,
today’s
children
are
encouraged
to
voice
their
opinion
and
to
form
their
own
attitudes,
whereas
two
hundred
years
ago,
children
were
urged
to
live
by
the
rules
of
their
parents’
religion
and
ethical
standards
and
to
keep
quiet:
‘children
were
meant
to
be
seen
but
not
heard.’
Crotty
Patrick
mentions
‘the
opening
scene
of
The
Barracks
(1963),
where
Willie,
Una,
and
Sheila
play
their
allotted
party
in
the
ritual
of
nightfall
in
the
presence
of
their
silently
suffering
stepmother,
[and
in
which]
Elizabeth,
introduces
us
to
a
world
where
children
have
a
deeply
ingrained
understanding
of
their
secondariness.’24
John
McGahern’s
novel
is
set
in
1940s
Ireland.
So
far
I
have
pointed
out
children’s
inferior
social
status
in
the
centuries
leading
up
to
the
19th
century.
However,
The
Barracks
illustrates
that
psychology
and
education
have
only
recently
managed
to
divert
the
generally
dismissive
attitude
towards
children.
Tanner
Tony
summarizes
that
the
morally
untrained
child
was,
in
fact,
considered
a
threat.
But
gradually
the
image
of
the
child
described
by
[Jean-‐Jacques]
Rousseau
and
celebrated
by
[William]
Wordsworth
filters
down
through
the
various
social
institutions.
Horace
Bushnell,
an
enlightened
theologian,
without
preaching
the
innate
goodness
of
the
child,
explicitly
condemns
the
educational
methods
based
on
a
presupposition
of
the
child’s
inherited
evil.
In
pleading
for
a
more
liberal
Christian
nurture
he
effectively
turns
attention
to
the
child’s
latent
instincts
and
aptitudes
and
advocates
their
more
natural,
unhampered
growth.
[…]
“It
is
frightful
to
think
how
they
batter
and
bruise
the
delicate
tender
souls
of
their
children,
extinguishing
in
them
what
they
ought
to
cultivate,
crushing
that
sensibility
which
is
the
hope
of
their
being,
and
all
in
the
name
of
Jesus
Christ.”
The
wide
influence
of
Bushnell
indicates
that
it
was
not
the
sophisticated
sensibility
of
the
adult
as
rehearsed
by
[Laurence]
Sterne,
but
rather
the
uncommitted,
almost
inarticulate
sensibility
of
the
child
that
had
become
the
focus
of
much
interest
by
the
time
[Henry]
James
and
[Samuel]
Clemens
were
writing.25
The
French
novel
Un
Bon
Petit
Diable,
by
the
‘Comtesse
de
Ségur,’
born
Sophie
Rostopchine,
which
appeared
in
1865
highlights
the
rising
trend
of
naming
and
denouncing
inappropriate
adult
behaviour
in
relation
to
children.
In
Sophie
Rostopchine’s
coming-‐off-‐age
novel,
the
main
character
Charles
is
twelve
years
old
and
he
keeps
playing
tricks
on
his
mean
aunt.
This
French
novel
illustrates
the
dichotomous
perception
of
the
time:
On
the
one
hand,
people
still
want
to
believe
24
Crotty,
Patrick.
“’All
Toppers’:
Children
in
the
Fiction
of
John
McGahern.”
Irish
University
Review
(Dec.
1961):
205-‐218,
206/
207
–
Further
references
are
included
in
the
text
(TT).
38
that
children
deserve
being
treated
in
the
condescending
way
adults
were
used
to,
because
children
allegedly
misbehave
and
need
to
be
chastised,
according
to
religious
convention.
Alice
Miller
sums
up
that
‘society
[chose]
to
disregard
the
mistreatment
of
children,
judging
it
to
be
altogether
normal,
because
it
[was]
so
commonplace.’26
On
the
other
hand,
there
was
the
idea
that
adults
also
need
to
watch
their
behaviour
and
attitude
and
that
children
are
inherently
good,
when
they
get
a
chance.
Still,
we
need
to
note
that
a
countess,
who
was
a
member
of
a
society
that
could
afford
their
offspring
an
education,
wrote
Un
Bon
Petit
Diable.
This
social
circumstance
highlights
that
there
were
looming
changes
in
terms
of
how
to
educate
and
treat
children,
according
to
their
age
and
needs.
However,
those
initial
debates
happened
in
selected
social
classes
and
did
not
constitute
a
common
change
in
people’s
attitudes.
Still,
although
contemporary
children
are
encouraged
to
speak
up,
whenever
and
with
whomever
they
are,
I
wonder
how
today’s
children
can
form
their
own
attitudes
in
relation
to
a
subject,
when
they
are
confronted
or
flooded
with
too
much
information?
Nowadays,
children
have
to
grow
up
intellectually
much
quicker,
in
order
to
make
sense
of
all
the
information
youngsters
are
confronted
with,
on
a
daily
basis.
Of
course,
on
the
other
hand,
one
can
say
that
children
in
the
old
days
had
to
study
the
Bible
and
repeat
their
elders’
point
of
view
and
adopt
adult
behaviour
all
too
quickly,
because
they
had
to
fend
for
themselves.
So,
although
children
in
the
past
had
to
use
their
imagination,
in
order
to
construct
their
understanding
of
the
world,
past
children
were,
on
the
other
hand,
subject
to
adult
and
religious
indoctrination
and
could
not
fully
or
independently
make
up
their
own
mind.
Nowadays,
psychoanalytical
studies
have
made
it
possible
for
children
to
be
ministered
according
to
their
age:
teaching
material
is
adapted
to
the
child’s
understanding
and
needs
and
children
have
much
more
material
to
enhance
their
creative
sides.
Yet,
today’s
children
have
to
cope
with
a
society
aligned
with
materialism.
The
adults’
desire
for
high
economic
standard
and
the
aspiration
to
a
more
or
less
luxurious
lifestyle,
lead
to
parents
leaving
their
children
alone
at
26
McCall
Smith,
Alexander.
Collins
Dictionary
of
Quotations.
Glasgow:
Harper
Collins.
2003,
80
–
home
or
under
the
care
of
nannies
or
day
care
centres,
in
order
to
earn
a
living
and
to
finance
those
extravagant
dreams.
In
a
way,
nowadays
children
are
also
left
to
get
on
by
themselves,
like
17th
century
children,
but
now
the
focus
is
more
on
psychological
and
emotional
rather
than
on
financial
scarcity.
Additionally,
we
need
to
ask
the
question
to
what
extent
specially
child
adapted
teaching
and
playing
material
is
relevant
if
a
child
has
to
deal
with
an
adult
world
on
a
daily
basis
anyway?
Is
it
not
confusing
for
a
modern
child
to
have
free
access
to
adult
life,
like
the
parents’
divorce
files
or
sexual
information,
while
on
the
other
hand
being
treated
like
a
child
in
relation
to
schooling?
In
the
21st
century,
there
are
allusions
to
sexual
activity
on
various
multimodal
levels,
while
the
divorce
rate
of
people
has
never
been
as
high
as
nowadays.
Our
children
grow
up
in
a
world
where
adults
transmit
the
idea
that
(sexual)
relationships
between
partners
are
commonly
fleeting
and
unstable.
Consequently,
children
have
to
endure
the
tug
game
between
parents,
who
got
a
divorce,
while
trying
to
find
some
sort
of
stability
in
their
young
lives.
A
couple
of
centuries
ago,
children
were
beaten,
if
they
misbehaved
and
they
had
to
work
hard
as
factory
labourers,
but
their
existence
was
stable.
Children
in
the
past
knew
what
to
expect
from
their
elders,
while
nowadays
children
have
to
suffer
from
their
parents’
inconsistency.
Of
course,
I
am
not
an
advocate
of
chastising
children.
The
point
I
want
to
make
is
that
the
adult-‐child
relationship
has
moved
from
one
guilt
trip
to
another,
throughout
the
centuries.
In
the
past,
parents
needed
to
feel
guilty
for
releasing
the
tension,
created
by
their
financial
worries,
by
beating
up
their
children,
while
currently
parents
buy
acquittal
for
depriving
their
children
of
homely
stability,
by
spending
a
vast
amount
of
money
on
toys
and
on
granting
their
offspring
extravagant
wishes.
Helena
Schneider
notes
that
in
the
past
children
were
considered
as
adults,
as
soon
as
they
knew
how
to
fend
for
themselves.
The
critic
explains
that
emotional
or
intellectual
development
was
a
secondary
criterion
in
defining
whether
a
young
person
was
still
considered
or
treated
as
a
child
or
not:
‘Der
Zustand
des
Erwachsenseins
wurde
demnach
gleichgesetzt
mit
der
Fähigkeit,
sich
versorgen
zu
können
und
hatte
nichts
zu
tun
mit
geistiger
oder
emotionaler
Reife’
(HS
10).
In
a
way,
past
societies
were
right,
since
it
is
a
challenge
to
define
at
what
age a young person passes from childhood into the teenage phase and then, into
40
adulthood.
Some
children
aged
ten
or
less,
at
times,
behave
and
act
more
mature,
than
people
aged
sixteen
or
seventeen.
Consequently,
the
term
‘child’
legally
refers
to
a
defined
age
group,
but
not
to
a
person’s
intellectual,
emotional
and
physical
capacities.
This
distinction
allows
our
social
system
to
apply
different
legal
consequences
and
to
control
people
accordingly
to
their
age.
This
method
supports
a
regulated
form
of
life,
but
this
approach
does
not
capture
all
the
children,
who
have
attained
a
level
of
maturity,
which
is
more
advanced
for
their
age.
In
contrast,
adults
are
sometimes
chided
as
being
childish
or
as
behaving
like
a
child,
extracting
a
pejorative
connotation.
When
we
say
of
a
person
that
he
or
she
is
a
child,
then
we
limit
that
person;
we
circumcise
his
freedom
and
assume
that
a
person
does
not
know
how
to
act,
according
to
conventional
adult
behaviour.
In
this
case,
the
idea
of
‘child’
indicates
a
person’s
relation
to
another
person,
independent
of
his
physical
development.
Nevertheless,
conventions
are
just
that:
they
are
constructs
that
allow
us
to
interact
with
each
other
as
individuals,
on
more
or
less
the
same
level
of
understanding.
Now,
if
an
adult
acts
differently
to
the
norm
or
acts
like
we
would
expect
a
child
to
act,
we
have
to
understand
that
he
has
constructed
his
own
reality,
including
and
catering
for
his
individual
conventions.
Conversely,
is
it
appropriate
to
say
that
that
person
acts
like
a
child,
taking
into
account
that
the
idea
of
acting
like
a
child
has
a
negative
connotation?
On
the
one
hand,
we
belittle
a
person
and
take
away
his
freedom,
by
saying
that
he
acts
like
a
child.
Yet,
on
the
other
hand,
once
the
adult
world
has
written
a
person
off
as
childish,
then
that
individual
has
the
jester’s
license
to
expand
in
any
way
he
wants.
If
society
expects
behaviour
deviant
to
the
norm,
a
person
might
as
well
act
irresponsibly
and
childishly.
In
contrast,
when
we
say
that
a
child
behaves
like
an
adult,
then
this
diagnosis
is
usually
conceived
as
a
positive
character
trait.
The
grown-‐ups
consider
the
child
mature
and
responsible
for
his
age.
Allowedly,
one
can
regard
the
child
as
precocious
and
smart-‐alec,
depending
on
the
child’s
character
and
way
of
expressing
himself,
but
usually
a
child
thinking
and
acting
along
the
lines
of
an
adult
is
taken
in
well.
Children’s
behaviour
is
different
from
ours,
but
it
is
the
adult’s
construct
to
say
that
adult
behaviour
or
the
grown-‐up
attitude
is
right
or
trend
setting.
41
1987)
argued
that
‘children
have
never
been
very
good
at
listening
to
their
elders,
but
they
have
never
failed
to
imitate
them.
They
must,
they
have
no
other
models’
(AMC
79).
The
point
I
want
to
make
is
that
there
are
children
that
behave
like
adults
and
that
talk
like
adults,
because
the
young
people
imitate
their
elders.
This
being
ahead
of
the
group
is
not
the
norm,
but
exceptions
like
this
illustrate
that
defining
what
a
child
is
cannot
depend
on
people’s
individual
aptitudes
and
age,
but
that
classifying
people
as
children,
teenagers,
adults
and
elders
serves
the
purpose
of
organizing
our
social
cooperation
as
a
number
of
individuals
with
different
needs.
Additionally,
it
is
a
fact
that
children
and
elders
have
less
developed
physical
abilities
than
people
in
their
30s,
so
these
terms
also
serve
the
purpose
of
protecting
young
people
from
exploitation
and
child
labour.
Tamar
Schapiro
argues
that
the
idea
that
children
have
a
special
status,
one
which
is
different
from
that
of
adults,
is
evident
in
our
everyday
attitudes.
Our
basic
concept
of
a
child
is
that
of
a
person
who
in
some
fundamental
way
is
not
yet
developed,
but
who
is
in
the
process
of
developing.
It
is
in
virtue
of
children’s
undeveloped
condition
that
we
feel
that
we
have
special
obligations
to
them,
obligations
which
are
of
a
more
paternalistic
nature
than
our
obligations
to
other
adults.
The
special
obligations
to
children
include
duties
to
protect,
nurture,
discipline,
and
educate
them.
They
are
paternalistic
in
nature,
because
we
feel
bound
to
fulfill
them
regardless
of
whether
the
children
in
question
consent
to
be
protected,
nurtured,
disciplined,
and
educated.
Indeed
we
think
of
children
as
people
who
have
to
be
raised,
whether
they
like
it
or
not.
(TS
716)
Tamar
Schapiro
is
right
when
he
points
out
that
adults
feel
naturally
responsible
for
children.
The
question
remains
though,
whether
every
adult
has
the
right
emotional,
psychological
and
intellectual
capacity
to
educate
a
young
person.
Often
adults
feel
superior
to
children
on
the
grounds
that
they
are
older
and
have
more
life
experience,
but
when
an
outsider
has
a
closer
look
at
various
adult-‐child
relationships,
then
it
becomes
apparent
that
at
times,
the
child
behaves
more
ethically
and
compassionately
developed,
than
the
older
person.
The
discrepancy
between
social
norm
and
reality
highlights
that
the
notion
of
the
child
is
a
social
construct
that
regulates
everyday
life
and
the
social
system,
but
that
cannot
fully
characterize
a
person’s
behaviour,
attitude
or
way
of
expression.
What
characterizes
and
forms
individual
behaviour
and
attitude
are
social
circumstances,
life
experiences
and
a
natural
understanding
of
the
world
and
its
people,
independent
of
age
and
race.
In
the
present
thesis,
the
notion
of
child
that
I
43
am
going
to
use
is
the
one
defined
by
our
society,
where
a
child
is
a
person
under
the
age
of
eighteen,
even
after
having
figured
out
that
there
is
a
grey
area
that
blurs
the
definition
of
and
the
distinction
between
adult
and
child.
Additionally,
we
will
see
that
each
author
masters
the
art
of
bestowing
special
abilities,
character
traits
and
attitudes
on
their
child
characters,
independently
of
the
character’s
intended
age.
44
45
and,
at
that
point,
the
investigator
would
be
struck
by
the
unexpected
discovery.
He
would
realize,
not
without
awe,
that
the
children
had
to
be
heard
because
they
were
dying.
The
child
is
born
in
literature
with
a
destiny
of
death
in
life.28
On
the
one
hand,
Franco
Ferrucci
is
of
course
right
when
he
addresses
the
poor
working
conditions
and
exploitation
of
children.
Additionally,
in
general,
the
poorer
the
family,
the
more
children
the
parents
had,
as
a
way
of
securing
their
future
accommodation.
Consequently,
famine,
low
hygienic
standards
and
disease
led
to
the
death
of
a
large
number
of
children,
with
poor
health
and
shabby
care.
On
the
other
hand
though,
I
cannot
fully
agree
with
Franco
Ferrucci’s
conclusion,
because
from
the
18th
century
onwards
up
to
the
present
date,
children
have
continuously
and
gradually
come
to
attract
the
attention
of
psychologists,
teachers,
authors
and
parents.
The
increase
in
literature,
which
focuses
on
children,
does
not
just
illustrate
the
high
infantile
death
rate,
but
literary
expression
also
mirrors
the
rising
status
of
children
in
society.
Elinor
Ochs
also
points
out
that
‘narratives
are
often
launched
in
response
to
current
worries,
complaints,
and
conflicts.
In
a
reciprocal
way,
in
the
course
of
their
telling,
portions
of
narratives
may
provoke
interlocutors’
concerns
about
the
present
and
future’
(EO
25).
Of
course,
Elinor
Ochs’
observation
expands
beyond
literature
that
is
written
from
a
child’s
perspective.
Any
text
intends
to
provoke
the
reader’s
reaction
and
incite
thinking
about
or
questioning
of
established
worldviews.
Consequently,
there
are
those
narratives
that
the
reader
chooses
as
a
response
to
his
own
current
problems
and
that
he
consults
as
a
reference
point
for
a
personal
conflict.
In
contrast,
there
are
those
concerns
that
Elinor
Ochs
mentions
above,
which
are
related
to
specific
events
in
time.
In
those
cases,
literature
helps
to
display
and
digest
contemporary
events
and
preserve
that
experience
in
time.
If
we
think
of
current
incidents
that
are
exposed
through
literature,
then
topics
like
terrorist
attacks
or
child
abuse
come
to
mind.
In
Extremely
Loud
and
Incredibly
Close,
Jonathan
Safran
Foer
discusses
the
specific
topic
of
how
a
child
feels
after
and
deals
with
the
loss
of
the
father,
because
of
a
terrorist
attack.
Equally,
there
are
currently
biographies
of
children
that
have
fallen
victim
to
adult
sexual
abuse
or
to
abduction
by
adults.
The
topic
of
child
abuse
is
not
a
recent
phenomenon.
There
have
been
cases
of
child
abuse
as
long
as
there
have
been
humans.
The
28
Ferrucci,
Franco.
“The
Dead
Child:
A
Romantic
Myth.”
MLN
104.1
(Jan.
1989):
117-‐134,
117/
118.
46
interesting
development
though
is
that
only
recently
the
taboo
has
been
broken
that
made
it
impossible
to
discuss
child
abuse
publicly.
Thus,
literature
mirrors
and
discusses
those
topics
that
a
current
society
is
ready
to
deal
with.
Finally,
if
we
agree
that
the
child
has
gradually
adopted
a
more
prominent
social
role,
we
can
argue
that
the
old
idea
of
the
child,
as
financial
asset,
had
to
die,
in
order
to
enable
the
birth
of
the
more
enlightened,
public
role
of
the
child.
In
relation,
children
at
the
time
were
literally
and
figuratively
dying,
at
the
time
when
the
adults’
attention
started
to
veer
in
the
young
people’s
direction.
It
is
the
child’s
destiny
to
die
in
terms
of
its
family
identity
and
to
emerge
as
an
individual.
Before
the
rise
of
the
child’s
public
status,
children
were
defined
according
to
their
social
background.
The
definition
of
people
in
relation
to
their
social
background,
by
their
contemporaries,
is
still
a
common
practice,
but
nowadays,
society
is
more
anxious
furthering
a
child
with
a
poor
social
background,
than
exploiting
that
young
person,
in
terms
of
child
labour
or
in
terms
of
denying
him
a
basic
educational
standard.
Helena
Fischer
has
pointed
out
that
Huckleberry
Finn
was
the
first
novel
written
from
a
child’s
perspective,
but
in
contrast
we
have
to
admit
that
Marc
Twain’s
novel
is
a
‘Bildungsroman,’
which
is
a
coming-‐off-‐age
novel,
where
the
protagonist
develops
throughout
the
novel.
In
that
respect,
Marc
Twain’s
novel
is
one
in
a
series
of
books
that
find
their
origin
in
the
Middle
Ages
and
even
before
that,
in
the
Bible.
The
focus
of
this
literary
genre
is
directed
at
the
protagonist’s
self-‐development.
The
young
main
character
has
to
overcome
a
number
of
challenges,
through
which
he
grows
emotionally
and
physically
stronger,
until
he
reaches
his
intended
goal
or
until,
for
his
age,
he
has
attained
an
advanced
level
of
maturity.
Today’s
novels
that
centre
on
the
child
can
also
be
classified
as
belonging
to
the
category
of
‘Bildungsroman,’
but
the
challenges
that
our
modern
literary
heroes
have
to
overcome
are
different
to
the
defiance
the
ancient
figures
had
to
deal
with.
The
difference
between
previous
forms
of
coming-‐off-‐age
novels
and
their
contemporary
versions
is
that
nowadays
the
child
turns
into
the
narrator,
commenting
on
his
own
development,
whereas
in
the
past,
the
child’s
development
was
portrayed
from
an
adult
perspective.
The
modern
child
narrator
criticizes
and
judges
his
own
progress,
while
the
reading
adult
turns
into
a
silenced
observer.
Of
47
course,
the
adult
author
creates
the
child
narrator
and
bestows
a
voice
upon
him.
In
that
respect,
the
focus
has
moved
away
from
the
child’s
psyche,
towards
the
message
that
the
adult
creator
wants
his
child
puppet
to
transmit.
In
contrast
though,
throughout
the
reading
process,
the
reader
imagines
a
child
narrator
and
what
his
imaginary
child
says
appears
to
the
reader
as
thoughts
being
conceived
and
voiced
by
a
child.
The
author
moves
into
the
background
during
the
reading
process
and
the
reader’s
attention
is
attracted
by
the
child’s
narrative.
How
convincing
the
narrator’s
voice
is
as
that
of
a
child,
or
how
realistic
the
narrator’s
language
needs
to
be
as
that
belonging
to
a
child,
will
be
discussed
later
on.
Moreover,
one
should
think
that
authors,
who
have
children
of
their
own
or
who
are
in
regular
contact
with
children,
as
teachers
for
instance,
feel
more
at
ease
writing
from
a
child’s
perspective,
because
those
writers
know,
by
experience,
how
children
behave
and
how
young
people
express
themselves.
However,
taking
care
of
children
requires
a
lot
of
time
investment
and
effort,
so
childless
writers
have
more
time
to
work
on
their
text.
Secondly,
the
more
distance
a
person
has
to
a
subject
matter,
the
broader
the
outlook
can
be.
When
you
entertain
an
adequate
amount
of
distance
to
a
problem,
you
are
uninfluenced
or
untainted
by
your
experience
and
you
remain
unbiased.
Of
course,
in
order
to
write
about
children,
the
author
needs
to
have
a
realistic
amount
of
psychological
and
linguistic
knowledge
of
children’s
abilities,
in
order
to
recreate
a
convincing
child
narrator.
For
an
author
it
is
sufficient
though
to
draw
from
his
own
childhood
experiences
and
to
feed
on
daily
observations,
in
order
to
illustrate
how
young
people
behave.
Yet,
I
have
argued
that
authors,
who
live
with
children
on
a
daily
basis,
might
be
too
biased
at
times
to
create
a
realistic
and
balanced
child
narrator,
for
one
because
of
time
limitations
and
secondly,
because
parenting
authors
are
too
closely
involved
with
their
offspring.
If
an
author
finds
raising
his
children
challenging
and
if
his
children
cry
a
lot,
then
the
author
might
develop
a
tendency
to
reflect
these
assumed
character
traits
in
his
novel.
If
this
situation
is
the
case,
we
need
to
ask
the
question
to
what
extent
it
is
necessary
to
create
a
positive
child
character.
If
the
author’s
impression
of
children
is
negative,
then
it
is
perfectly
legitimate
to
express
this
downbeat
experience
through
writing.
48
29
Donnelly,
Brian.
“Inventing
a
Voice:
Irish
Fiction
from
1800.”
The
Harp
15
(2000):
65-‐74,
67.
30
Schulock,
Anne.
“In
Praise
of
Precocious
Narrators.”
Themillions.com:
http://www.themillions.com/2010/07/in-‐praise-‐of-‐precocious-‐narrators.html–
Further
references
are
included
in
the
text
(ASL).
50
the
reading
process,
fully
depends
on
the
reader’s
ability
to
construct
a
coherent
and
conclusive
realism,
based
on
the
information
the
narrator
provides
him
with.
Consequently,
expression,
comprehension
and
response
of
reader
and
narrator
vary,
according
to
age,
social
and
ethnical
background
of
the
child
narrator,
writer,
and
reader.
When
the
writer
stems
from
a
culture
where
children
are
perceived
as
naïve,
then
the
story
mirrors
this
attitude
as
well.
So,
the
reader
who
distinguishes
between
a
realistic
child
narrator
and
an
unrealistic
one,
is
at
the
same
time
negotiating
a
whole
set
of
social
attitudes
and
conventions.
By
judging
how
an
author
portrays
a
child
narrator,
the
reader
is
automatically
also
judging
the
author’s
background
and
his
society’s
attitude
towards
how
to
raise
and
treat
children.
If
the
reader
has
made
the
same
experiences
in
relation
to
child
behaviour
and
if
the
reader
has
the
same
attitude
to
child
minding,
then
the
reader
will
find
the
child
narrator
realistic
and
entertain
a
more
sympathetic
relation
to
the
reading
process
and
its
characters,
than
as
if
the
opposite
had
been
the
case.
However,
if
there
is
a
discrepancy
between
the
reader’s
conception
of
childlike
behaviour
and
that
of
the
writer,
then
the
reader
perceives
the
child
narrator
as
not
viable,
which
also
circumcises
the
poignancy
of
the
novel’s
message.
In
the
end,
if
we
have
a
second
look
at
the
foregoing
debate
of
what
a
child
really
is
and
if
we
remember
that
the
notion
of
‘child’
can
also
be
employed
to
indicate
a
person’
s
immaturity
and
carelessness,
then
we
can
also
say
that
a
childless
adult
author,
who
has
never
had
to
take
responsibility
for
another
human
being,
can
also
still
be
designated
as
a
‘child.’
This
train
of
thought
is
of
course
a
cliché,
but
logically
we
would
have
to
admit
that
since
the
idea
of
‘the
child’
is
not
really
definable,
then
a
carefree
adult,
writing
a
book
from
a
child’s
perspective,
writes
from
his
own
perspective,
because
he
has
never
learned
how
to
think
and
act
like
an
adult.
In
that
case,
the
author
is
freed
from
inventing
his
character’s
internal
world,
because
he
can
use
his
own
attitude
as
reference
point.
Of
course,
the
foregoing
statement
is
exaggerated,
but
I
want
to
use
this
argument
in
order
to
illustrate
that
people’s
realities
and
how
each
individual
defines
his
environmental
truth
varies
from
one
person
to
the
other’s
personal
perception.
When
analyzing
the
role
of
the
child
narrator
in
Extremely
Loud
&
Incredibly
Close
and
The
Life
Before
Us,
we
need
to
bear
in
mind
that
the
child
narrator’s
voice
serves
a
function,
which
we
are
going
to
dismantle.
This
function
51
influences
the
narrator’s
attitudes
and
actions,
while
the
author’s
and
our
own
experiences,
as
readers
determine
our
positive
or
negative
perception
of
the
narrator
as
a
convincing
child,
too.
If
we
assume
that
an
author
has
created
a
narrator,
who
is
a
generally
true-‐
to-‐life
child,
we
need
to
assume
that
our
child
narrator
ignores
logic.
He
omits
information
and
the
way
he
narrates
is
a
stream
of
consciousness,
jumping
from
one
topic
to
the
other.
Elinor
Ochs
points
out
that
‘narrative
[…]
is
a
fundamental
means
of
making
sense
of
experience’
(EO
19).
On
the
one
hand,
the
fact
that
the
narrator
omits
information
is
due
to
the
fact
that
he
lives
in
another
reality
than
adults.
To
an
adult,
work,
family
and
income
are
of
prior
interest,
while
a
child’s
world
revolves
around
marks
at
school,
the
amount
of
friends
he
has,
his
security
at
home
and
how
other
children
treat
him.
In
The
Curious
Incident
of
the
Dog
in
The
Night-Time,
by
Mark
Haddon,
Christopher
draws
attention
to
the
child’s
concerns
in
a
conversation
with
his
mother:
‘And
I
said,
“I
have
to
go
back
to
Swindon.”
And
mother
said,
“Christopher,
you’ve
only
just
got
here.”
And
I
said,
“I
have
to
go
back
because
I
have
to
sit
my
Maths
A
level.”’31
When
an
adult
reader
is
wondering
why
information
relevant
to
us
as
readers
is
left
out,
or
why
the
child
narrator
expands
a
specific,
yet
to
the
adult
irrelevant,
topic,
then
we
need
to
revert
back
to
a
child’s
logic.
In
the
end,
we
need
to
ask
ourselves
if,
when
reading
a
novel
featuring
a
child
narrator,
we
then
look
to
understand
the
novel
as
the
child,
we
once
were
or
as
the
adult
we
are
now?
The
text
can
be
read
and
interpreted
on
various
levels
and
thus,
makes
the
text
multidimensional.
Of
course,
when
we
read
a
novel
written
from
an
adult’s
perspective,
the
reader
can
also
try
to
interpret
the
book
on
various
levels.
The
reader
can
for
example
try
to
interpret
the
narrator
or
the
characters’
behaviour
in
relation
to
their
childhood.
Yet,
when
we
read
a
text
narrated
from
another
adult’s
point
of
view,
we
will
always
judge
as
the
adult
we
currently
are.
When
a
novel
is
narrated
from
a
child’s
perspective,
the
reader
has
the
choice
to
view
the
book
as
a
child’s
construct
and
to
try
and
remember
how
we
felt
and
acted
as
children.
However,
the
possibility
to
interpret
the
novel
on
different
levels
only
works,
if
the
reader
is
aware
of
this
option.
It
can
also
be
the
case
that
we
31
Haddon,
Mark.
The
Curious
Incident
of
the
Dog
in
the
Night-Time.
London:
Vintage.
2004,
246.
52
unconsciously
read
on
various
levels
and
use
the
best
possible
age
level
or
frame
of
mind,
in
order
to
understand
the
text,
without
us
consciously
trying
to
vary
our
point
of
view
during
the
reading
process.
Or
the
reader
adopts
one
position
to
start
off
with
and
keeps
that
position,
either
viewing
the
book
from
an
adult’s
perspective
or
from
a
child’s
perspective,
but
constantly
remaining
in
the
same
frame
of
mind.
It
would
be
interesting
to
see
how
a
novel
can
consciously
be
interpreted
from
different
points
of
view,
but
then
the
conscious
hunt
for
different
levels
of
meaning
disrupts
the
light-‐hearted
reading
process.
Finally,
Byron
Almén
argues
that
it
would
seem
that
the
two
primary
functions
of
the
narrator
are
to
1)
situate
the
related
events
in
the
past,
as
having
already
occurred,
and
to
2)
organize
the
plot
or
story
in
a
coherent
manner.
With
respect
to
point
2,
we
have
seen
that
the
task
of
making
connections
between
events
in
a
temporal
sequence
does
not
depend
essentially
upon
the
presence
of
a
narrator,
that
the
reader/listener/observer
may
play
the
primary
role
in
this
respect.
If
that
is
the
case,
then
a
narrator
is
not
required
in
order
to
provide
coherence
among
events.32
In
the
novels
featuring
a
child
narrator
that
I
have
read
so
far,
the
child
narrator
has
always
been
a
first-‐person
narrator,
who
discovers
his
surroundings
as
he
progresses
in
the
world.
Unless
the
narrator
turns
at
times
into
an
omniscient
narrator
and
thus,
switches
between
roles
within
the
novel,
he
is
bound
to
miss
out
on
information,
because
he
falls
short
of
constantly
observing
and
analyzing
all
the
other
characters
in
the
novel.
Yet,
the
child
narrator
is
not
necessarily
meant
to
relate
to
the
events
in
his
life
in
a
linear
manner,
because
also
a
child
can
have
flashbacks
to
past
incidents
in
his
life
and
a
child
can
also
plan
ahead
and
imaginarily
construct
his
future.
Thus,
Byron
Almén
is
right
when
he
says
that
it
depends
also
on
the
reader
to
what
extent
the
story
or
plot
becomes
a
coherent
whole.
In
the
end,
if
we
assume
that
children
always
partly
embody
their
ancestors’
lives,
we
can
say
that
child
narrators
manage
to
link
their
ancestors’
stories
to
the
present.
Child
narrators
become
a
tool
that
highlights
the
idea
that
past
narratives
are
born
from
the
lives
of
previous
generations.
Narratives
are
recurring
in
cycles
32
Almén,
Byron.
“Narrative
Archetypes:
A
Critique,
Theory,
and
Method
of
Narrative
Analysis.”
Journal
of
Music
Theory
47.1
(Spring
2003):
1-‐39,
8
–
Further
references
are
included
in
the
text
(BA).
53
and
no
matter
how
small
the
source
of
a
narrative
might
be
in
the
beginning,
the
story
will
always
develop
into
a
complex
whole.
In
conclusion,
the
device
of
the
child
narrator
has
only
recently
emerged
in
literature
as
an
independent
device.
However,
it
depends
not
just
on
the
author
and
on
how
he
develops
a
child
character,
but
the
complexity
of
a
character
also
depends
on
the
reader’s
ability
to
interpret
and
construct
a
coherent
child
narrator,
based
on
the
author’s
input.
54
adult
readers.
Yet,
teenagers
can
also
show
an
interest
in
a
novel
stigmatized
as
adult
read,
because
it
broaches
the
issue
of
a
problem
that
a
teenager
is
currently
faced
with.
Vice-‐versa,
an
adult
can
also
be
interested
in
a
teenage
read,
when
an
adult
has
to
deal
with
teenage
problems,
as
a
parent
or
educator,
for
instance.
In
that
respect,
not
just
a
person’s
private
context,
but
also
his
work
context
defines,
which
literature
an
individual
consults.
Additionally,
readers
generally
assume
that
adult
novels
deal
with
topics
that
are
more
challenging
to
come
to
terms
with
and
to
process
emotionally
and
psychologically.
Adults
assume
that
children
are
not
apt
yet
to
read
about
problems
like
violation,
sexual
abuse
and
unfaithfulness
in
relationships.
Consequently,
novels
dealing
with
those
and
similar
problems
are
categorized
as
adult
novels.
However,
in
the
past,
children
read
books
that
were
originally
intended
for
an
adult
readership.
Charles
Dickens’
Oliver
Twist
(1838)
or
Mark
Twain’s
The
Adventures
of
Huckleberry
Finn
(1884)
were
primarily
written
for
an
adult
public.
Robert
Bruce
explains
that
‘Huck
lies,
cheats,
steals,
and
defrauds
his
way
down
the
river.
These
traits
are
part
of
the
reason
that
Huck
Finn
was
viewed
as
a
book
not
acceptable
for
children.’33
However,
in
the
nineteenth
century,
children
read
the
texts
that
were
available
in
the
household,
because
the
parents
could
not
afford
to
buy
new
books
and
often
only
wealthy
families
possessed
their
own
copies
anyway.
Moreover,
children
nowadays
are
confronted
with
much
more
graphic
violence
and
abuse
on
a
daily
basis,
than
children
would
be
able
to
imagine,
when
reading
a
novel,
which
focuses
on
the
same
set
of
problems.
Consequently,
the
difference
between
an
adult
novel
and
a
children’s
novel
does
not
lie
in
how
appropriate
or
easily
digestible
the
content
is
for
a
reader,
but
how
much
that
reader
can
draw
from
and
develop,
because
of
the
reading
process.
A
child
reading
about
marital
unfaithfulness
can
understand
the
novel’s
content,
but
he
will
not
be
able
to
use
the
character’s
conclusions
or
way
of
dealing
with
the
challenges
he
is
facing,
because
the
setting
is
miles
apart
from
his
own
childlike
worldview.
In
contrast
though,
a
child
of
divorced
parents,
who
reads
about
marital
problems,
might
still
find
it
challenging
to
understand
all
the
adult
worries
and
qualms,
yet
the
reading
process
might
lead
to
the
child’s
realization
that
there
are
further
33
Bruce,
Robert.
Cliffs
Notes
On
Twain’s
Huckleberry
Finn.
N.Y.:
Wiley
Publishing.
2000,
81.
56
couples
and
families,
who
have
to
live
through
similar
experiences
and
as
a
consequence,
the
child
refrains
from
blaming
himself
as
the
source
of
the
parents’
separation,
which
is
an
attitude
that
children
commonly
adopt
in
divorce
cases.
In
contrast,
an
adult
reading
a
children’s
novel
has
the
necessary
experience
in
order
to
interpret
more
into
a
text,
than
there
might
actually
be.
For
example,
J.K.
Rowling’s
Harry
Potter
series
(1997)
focuses
on
the
life
of
a
wizard
child.
In
general,
in
terms
of
content,
we
would
say
that
these
texts
are
classical
children’s
novels,
because
they
revolve
around
a
reality
that
stimulates
children’s
fantasy
and
creativity
and
that
is
devoid
of
inappropriate
material
that
children
have
no
need
for
and
which
they
cannot
process,
according
to
a
lack
of
experience.
However,
it
is
a
fact
that
J.K.
Rowling’s
novels
also
attract
a
broad
adult
readership.
On
the
one
hand,
the
fantastic
elements
in
Harry
Potter
that
stimulate
the
children’s
dreams
also
stimulate
adult
musing
and
catapult
us
back
into
a
time,
when
life
was
less
cluttered
with
responsibility
and
when
we
did
not
need
to
pretend
yet,
that
we
are
cultured
and
educated
and
that
we
can
read
and
understand
complex
literary
texts.
On
the
other
hand,
adults
have
the
necessary
experience
to
identify
friction
and
show
of
power
between
characters,
which
turns
the
children’s
novel
into
a
metaphor
for
the
adult
world.
Consequently,
one
text
can
be
understood
and
interpreted
on
different
levels,
according
to
the
reader’s
needs,
experience
and
degree
of
intelligence.
The
difference
in
defining
a
novel
as
adult
novel
or
as
children’s
novel
lies
in
finding
the
age
category
for
which
a
novel
generally
offers
the
most
emotional
and
psychological
support.
According
to
our
theory,
novels
featuring
child
narrators
would
then
in
general
be
less
interesting
for
adult
readers,
because
the
story
is
told
from
a
child’s
perspective
and
centres
on
the
child’s
daily
problems.
However,
those
stories
like
The
Life
Before
Us
and
Extremely
Loud
&
Incredibly
Close
do
centre
on
children’s
lives,
but
their
settings
are
very
specific.
The
overall
topics
of
these
novels
revolve
around
drug
abuse,
prostitution,
terrorism
and
family
secrets,
which
are
all
issues
that
adults
need
to
process
and
find
answers
for.
Of
course,
a
child
who
has
lost
his
father
in
9/11
like
Oskar
in
Extremely
Loud
&
Incredibly
Close,
will
be
able
to
retrace
the
train
of
thought
of
the
protagonist
much
better
than
an
adult
reader,
who
has
never
even
been
to
America.
This
fact
illustrates
that
categorizing
novels
as
adult
novels
or
as
children’s
novels
is
always
just
a
generalization
and
varies
57
58
on
the
story
and
the
writer,
as
the
origin
of
the
text,
becomes
palpable
for
the
reader.
So,
if
an
author
like
Henry
James
has
shied
away
from
the
technique
of
presenting
a
narrative
from
a
pure
child
perspective,
then
which
assets
constitute
the
appeal
of
a
child
narrator?
What
makes
the
child
narrator’s
role
advantageous
for
adult
literature?
Or,
on
the
other
hand,
what
are
the
disadvantages
and
drawbacks
of
fiction
narrated
in
a
child’s
voice.
Those
are
the
key
questions
discussed
in
the
following
paragraphs.
First
of
all,
when
we
talk
about
advantages
and
disadvantages
in
relation
to
narrating
a
story
from
a
child’s
point
of
view,
we
need
to
specify
what
kind
of
benefit
or
shortcomings
we
are
talking
about
and
for
whom.
Firstly,
are
there
any
advantages
or
disadvantages
for
the
author,
when
creating
a
child
character
and
narrator
as
opposed
to
an
adult
narrator?
Is
it
possible
that
a
child
can
transmit
the
author’s
message
more
precisely
and
to
the
point
than
an
adult
narrator?
Or
does
the
message
come
to
lack
poignancy,
when
the
narrator
is
a
child?
Secondly,
what
are
the
advantages
or
drawbacks
for
the
reader,
when
the
story
is
told
from
a
child’s
perspective?
Can
the
reader
identify
with
a
child
character
and
narrator
at
all?
Does
the
intellectual
level
of
the
narrative
still
stimulate
the
reader’s
interest
when
a
child
tells
the
story?
59
And
finally,
can
the
child
in
real
life
benefit
in
any
way,
when
children
are
in
the
focus
of
fictional
texts
or
does
the
child’s
status
suffer
any
negative
consequences
after
a
book
featuring
a
child
narrator
has
been
published?
Does
literature,
which
depicts
the
child’s
social
situation,
influence
the
broader
public
attitude
and
behaviour
at
all?
We
are
going
to
discuss
the
forgoing
questions,
according
to
their
advantages
or
disadvantages
in
relation
to
broader
topics,
like
the
child
narrator’s
influence
on
the
literary
appeal
of
the
novel,
on
the
characters’
complexity
and
on
the
development
of
moral
questions,
rather
than
alternately
looking
at
the
advantages
or
disadvantages
for
author,
reader
and
child.
To
begin
with,
books
narrated
by
children
have
the
advantage
that
the
author
can
naturally
render
quirky
pictures,
drawings
or
cartoons
part
of
his
novel.
Usually,
if
adult
novels
narrated
by
adults
contain
illustrations,
then
they
present
the
world
from
a
grown-‐up’s
point
of
view.
In
a
novel,
narrated
by
a
child
though,
the
author
needs
to
make
sure
to
present
the
pictures
and
illustrations
from
a
child’s
perspective.
At
this
point,
the
question
is
raised
to
what
extent
one
can
distinguish
if
a
drawing
was
made
by
a
child
or
an
adult
and
what
exactly
is
a
child’s
perspective?
Adult
drawings
are
just
as
often
scrawly
and
in
disproportion
as
art
that
was
created
by
children.
If
we
imagine
though
that
we
have
one
and
the
same
picture,
once
being
presented
and
discussed
by
an
adult
narrator
and
once
by
a
child
narrator,
then
the
difference
lies
in
what
is
said
about
the
picture
and
how
the
discussion
develops
and
not
in
the
picture’s
content.
In
Extremely
Loud
&
Incredibly
Close
for
instance,
the
author
has
included
pictures
of
doorknobs
and
of
elevator
buttons,
because
those
items
are
at
the
child’s
eye
level
on
a
daily
basis.
These
inconspicuous,
but
essential,
everyday
objects
remind
the
reader
that
we
as
adults
have
often
lost
our
ability
to
pay
attention
to
detail.
Adults
take
most
of
their
environment
for
granted
and
wonder
very
rarely
about
everyday
items;
where
do
these
objects
come
from?
Do
we
really
need
them?
Are
we
grateful
for
their
existence
or
could
we
discard
them
and
declutter
our
lives?
In
general,
children
ask
more
questions
about
their
environment,
than
adults.
Children
have
the
ability
to
question
people,
events
and
experiences,
because
lots
of
the
young
people’s
encounters
with
the
world
are
new
and
children
have
less
reference
points
to
compare
their
experiences
with.
Readers
generally
find
it
more
60
acceptable
when
children
marvel
and
wonder
about
everyday
objects.
An
adult
drawing
attention
to
the
beauty
in
the
common
appears
melancholic
and
dreamy.
On
the
other
hand,
children
do
not
necessarily
wonder
more
about
their
environment
than
we
as
adults
do.
Yet,
as
already
mentioned
before,
children
have
the
ability
to
discuss
our
surrounding
world
on
a
different
level
than
grown-‐ups,
because
young
people
are
interested
in
a
different
reality
and
consequently
in
different
answers
than
adults.
Additionally,
the
author
can
also
use
the
visual
material
figuratively,
in
order
to
show
that
the
text’s
message
can
be
transmitted
on
different
levels.
In
Extremely
Loud
&
Incredibly
Close,
Jonathan
Safran
Foer
has
included
the
picture
of
a
doorknob,
as
already
mentioned.
On
a
first
level,
the
photograph
shows
the
reader
what
Oskar
sees
when
he
visits
different
people
throughout
the
story.
Oskar
is
smaller
than
an
adult
and
so,
Oskar
does
not
stand
face
to
face
with
the
grown-‐ups
he
meets,
but
his
height
automatically
renders
him
inferior
to
the
adults
he
meets.
Moreover,
the
picture
of
the
doorknob
shows
the
reader
that
Oskar
is
not
just
physically
smaller
than
an
adult,
but
the
photograph
also
highlights
the
child’s
limited
understanding
of
the
events
in
the
story.
The
visualization
of
Oskar’s
height
emphasises
his
relatively
small
impact
on
the
adult
world.
In
addition,
the
picture
that
Jonathan
Safran
Foer
has
chosen
represents
an
extravagant,
old-‐fashioned
doorknob.
The
reader
associates
the
visual
material
with
other
items
that
he
has
come
across
in
his
life.
Thus,
in
his
imagination,
the
reader
supports
his
understanding
of
the
story,
by
associating
the
visual
material
in
the
text
with
previous
similar
impressions
that
he
has
come
across
in
real
life.
Consequently,
the
reader
can
expand
the
story’s
scope
on
the
basis
of
the
visual
material
that
is
included
in
the
book,
without
the
author’s
interference.
Finally,
in
a
figurative
way,
the
picture
of
the
doorknob
also
shows
that
the
child’s
encounter
with
different
people
allows
him
to
grow
throughout
the
story:
the
more
doors
the
child
narrator
opens
on
his
journey,
the
more
he
will
emotionally,
physically,
and
psychologically
develop
as
time
passes
by.
An
adult
narrator
can
convey
the
same
impression,
because
to
what
extent
a
text
can
be
interpreted
on
a
figurative
level
vastly
depends
on
the
reader’s
understanding
and
ability
for
interpretation
and
not
solely
on
the
text
itself.
61
43,
20
–
Further
references
are
included
in
the
text
(EO).
62
and
illustrations,
from
his
earliest
years
to
the
present
date.
These
narrative
forms
are
only
two
possible
shapes
that
a
narrator
can
choose,
in
order
to
give
a
tangible
shape
to
an
otherwise
elusive
idea:
if
I
think
about
writing
a
biography,
for
example,
then
this
idea
remains
intangible,
until
I
use
a
kind
of
media
of
my
choice,
like
writing,
which
allows
me
to
capture
my
idea
and
to
turn
it
into
a
tangible
object,
like
a
book.
Additionally,
blendings
of
different
representative
modes
do
not
only
characterize
different
communities
and
settings,
but
multimodal
narratives
also
reach
a
wider
audience,
because
when
words
fail
to
communicate
meaning,
when
reader
and
writer
do
not
share
the
same
language,
then
visual
illustrations
manage
to
convey
an
equally
accurate
message.
Small
children,
for
example,
who
cannot
read
yet,
manage
to
understand
the
stories
their
picture
books
tell
them,
because
toddlers
are
used
to
a
basic
level
of
visual
representation.
In
a
child’s
case,
the
picture
book
story
can
also
be
accompanied
by
the
mother’s
oral
narrative
that
offers
further
explanations
and
creative
padding,
in
support
of
the
story’s
visual
level.
The
mother
telling
her
child
a
story
based
on
pictures,
also
illustrates
the
idea
that
one
mode
of
communication
can
expand
and
adopt
another
shape,
depending
on
the
reader
or
on
the
audience
in
general.
A
written
text,
which
is
read
out,
also
becomes
multimodal.
Moreover,
the
idea
of
the
mother
constructing
a
narrative
based
on
a
sequence
of
pictures,
highlights
Elinor
Ochs’
idea
that
‘a
single
frame
can
be
unpacked
through
literacy.’
The
mother
is
orally
transmitting
the
message
the
pictures
convey
to
her.
A
different
mother
might
understand
the
same
images
in
a
different
way
and
spin
a
different
story,
based
on
the
pictures.
Consequently,
allocating
meaning
to
one
narrative
form
and
turning
one
mode
of
illustration
into
another,
depends
on
the
person
who
does
the
deconstruction
and
later
reconstruction
of
the
ideas
at
hand.
Yet,
the
written
narrative
is
the
one
mode
that
allows
people
to
share
their
interpretation
of
an
experience
with
a
wider
audience.
If
people
orally
discuss
a
piece
of
art,
for
example,
then
exchange
is
of
course
taking
place,
but
this
discussion
remains
limited
to
the
world
of
a
restricted
number
of
people.
When
we
record
a
debate
on
paper
though,
the
discussed
ideas
remain
accessible
for
future
examination
by
different
people,
or
by
future
generations.
63
Finally,
narrative
forms
adopt
various
shapes
and
one
narrative
form
brings
about
another,
depending
on
the
audience.
Yet,
a
combination
of
narrative
modes
is
what
leads
to
the
most
accurate
transmission
and
understanding
of
the
message
that
the
sender
intends
to
convey.
Additionally,
in
relation
to
the
visual
material
that
an
author
uses
in
order
to
reinforce
his
written
message,
we
need
to
ask
the
question
whether
the
type
of
visual
material
that
an
author
chooses
for
his
novel
depends
on
the
narrator’s
character
or
not.
First,
the
writer
has
a
certain
image
in
mind,
when
he
creates
the
story’s
narrator.
Consequently,
the
writer
consciously
or
unconsciously
chooses
visual
material
that
he
associates
with
his
literary
figure
and
that
highlights
the
narrator’s
nature,
according
to
the
author.
Thus,
on
the
one
hand,
the
material
that
a
writer
picks,
in
order
to
visualize
his
texts,
depends
on
the
attitude
and
character
that
the
narrator
displays.
On
the
other
hand,
the
image
a
writer
has
in
mind,
when
he
creates
his
child
narrator,
is
not
necessarily
identical
to
the
reader’s
visualization
of
the
story’s
narrator.
The
reader
has
also
an
individual
conception
of
the
narrator
in
mind.
As
a
consequence,
the
reader
can
perceive
the
visual
material
included
in
a
novel
as
contradictory
to
the
narrator’s
nature
or
the
reader
fails
to
make
the
association
between
narrator
and
visual
material.
On
the
other
hand
again,
it
can
be
the
case
that
the
author
has
a
different
initial
understanding
of
the
narrator,
but
that
the
visual
material
helps
to
mould
the
reader’s
interpretation
and
understanding
of
the
narrator
along
the
lines
of
the
visual
material
that
the
author
has
chosen
or
the
reader
interprets
the
visual
material
according
to
the
narrator’s
character
as
he
has
understood
it.
Moreover,
there
is
also
the
question
whether
the
visual
material
that
an
author
includes
in
his
text
changes,
depending
on
the
narrator’s
age
and
function.
On
the
one
hand,
the
visual
material
serves
a
purpose
of
its
own,
because
the
visual
material
speaks
to
the
reader
on
a
different
level
than
the
written
word.
Pictures
and
drawings
are
meant
to
introduce
the
fact
that
there
are
different
levels
of
reality
and
that
a
person
can
look
at
a
problem
or
question
from
different
perspectives.
In
that
case,
the
author
either
chooses
pictures
that
are
shot
from
a
child’s
perspective,
in
order
to
confront
the
reader
with
the
child’s
outlook
on
the
world.
Or,
the
author
includes
pictures
that
mirror
an
adult’s
reality
and
thus,
64
manages
to
highlight
the
contrast
between
a
child
and
an
adult
perspective.
In
that
case,
the
child’s
perspective
reaches
the
reader
as
words
on
the
page
and
the
adult
perspective
adopts
the
form
of
the
visual
material.
Thus,
the
discrepancy
between
the
adult
and
the
child’s
world
would
also
adopt
a
figurative
dimension,
because
the
two
worlds
or
attitudes
are
represented
via
two
different
kinds
of
media.
However,
the
fact
that
the
novel
includes
both,
text
and
pictures,
shows
that
adult
and
child
perspective
can
and
need
to
work
together,
in
order
to
form
a
coherent
and
complex
whole.
So,
even
if
the
narrator’s
age
or
function
changes,
the
visual
material
is
still
intended
to
highlight
various
levels
of
interpretation
and
understanding
that
a
story
can
adopt
and
thus,
the
function
of
the
visual
material
remains
established,
independently
of
the
narrator.
On
the
other
hand,
the
content
of
the
visual
material
can
change
according
to
the
child
narrator’s
age
and
function,
if
the
author
wants
to
transmit
a
different
message,
than
the
one
discussed
in
the
foregoing
paragraph.
When
the
author
intends
to
underline
that
his
central
figure
has
a
specifically
pronounced
tick
for
example,
then
the
author
arranges
the
visual
material
in
his
story
in
such
a
way
that
the
chosen
pictures
support
the
child
narrator’s
character.
This
approach
is
for
example
the
case
in
Mark
Haddon’s
novel
The
Curious
Incident
of
the
Dog
in
the
Night-Time.
Christopher,
the
child
character
in
Mark
Haddon’s
novel,
has
Asperger’s
Syndrome
and
his
disposition
renders
him
talented
at
maths.
Consequently,
the
visual
material
included
in
the
novel
encompasses
mathematical
formula
and
symmetrical
shapes,
which
visualize
Christopher’s
way
of
looking
at
and
categorizing
his
surroundings.
Finally,
the
question
remains
whether
the
reader
senses
the
author
as
the
selector
of
the
novel’s
images
or
whether
the
reader
feels
as
if
he
is
confronted
with
a
child’s
point
of
view.
The
answer
to
this
question
depends
on
the
idea
to
what
extent
the
reader
is
immersed
in
the
story
and
manages
to
identify
with
the
novel’s
main
character.
When
a
reader
cannot
fully
identify
with
a
text
or
with
its
message,
then
the
reader
will
start
to
question
the
pictures
included
in
the
text,
too.
At
the
same
time,
as
a
consequence
of
the
reader’s
resistance
to
take
the
novel
at
face
value,
the
reader
also
starts
to
question
the
novel’s
message
and
the
characters’
authenticity.
So,
as
soon
as
the
reader
starts
to
feel
the
author’s
65
presence
as
the
origin
of
the
chosen
visual
material,
then
the
reader
also
begins
to
question
the
text
as
a
whole.
In
conclusion,
on
a
first
level,
the
child
narrator
manages
to
present
visual
material
differently
than
an
adult
narrator
and
a
child
narrator
can
attribute
different
levels
of
interpretation
to
pictures.
The
child’s
perspective
illustrates
that
there
is
a
reality
different
to
our
adult
perception.
In
When
We
Were
Romans,
Lawrence
says:
‘Its
all
ruins,
there
are
just
a
few
columns
and
walls
so
I
thought
“this
is
boring”
but
actually
that
was
wrong,
you
must
close
your
eyes
and
use
your
imagination
you
see.’35
Literally
looking
from
a
different
perspective
at
the
world
surrounding
us,
helps
the
reader
to
question
his
own
perception
of
the
world.
Of
course,
if
the
narrator
was
an
adult,
he
could
also
outline
and
highlight
a
reality
contrasting
our
own,
by
viewing
and
discussing
problems
from
a
different
perspective.
However,
children
draw
our
attention
to
our
surroundings,
highlighting
the
extraordinary
in
the
ordinary,
whereas
another
adult
figure
shares
our
level
of
perception
from
a
different
angle,
instead
of
from
a
different
level
and
varied
angle.
The
child’s
perspective
reminds
the
reader
that
our
understanding
of
the
world
is
not
universal
and
propagates
tolerance
and
understanding
of
otherness.
Additionally,
children
are
confronted
with
different
kinds
of
media
than
adults
and
accordingly,
their
worldview
is
different
from
ours.
Children
watch
children’s
TV
and
read
books
for
children,
which
often
also
include
illustrations.
Consequently,
an
author
who
includes
pictures
in
his
novel
puts
the
adult
reader
on
a
child’s
level,
because
the
author
relegates
the
adult
reader
into
a
child’s
shoes,
by
offering
adult
literature
under
a
form
similar
to
children’s
literature.
Of
course,
nowadays
children
are
more
and
more
confronted
with
a
world
of
media
that
is
not
tailored
to
children’s
needs.
In
that
case,
children
have
to
cope
with
a
reality
that
is
beyond
their
understanding.
Adult
novels
narrated
by
children,
take
this
aspect
into
account
too.
The
pictures
included
in
the
novels
represent
situations
or
items
that
children
need
to
deal
with,
because
life
confronts
them
with
unknown
situations,
but
which
young
people
find
it
hard
to
make
sense
of.
In
Extremely
Loud
&
Incredibly
Close,
Jonathan
Safran
Foer
includes
pictures
of
a
35
Kneale,
Matthew.
When
We
Were
Romans.
London:
Picador.
2008,
59
–
Further
references
are
man
jumping
from
the
Twin
Towers
on
9/11.
Those
pictures
show
a
real
life
situation
and
are
not
drawn
by
a
child’s
hand.
Consequently,
the
view
that
the
adult
reader
and
the
child
narrator
share
is
identical.
In
this
case,
the
child’s
perspective
does
not
introduce
a
new
aspect
to
the
discussion,
in
terms
of
how
the
outlook
on
the
world
varies
from
adult
to
child.
In
the
case
of
Jonathan
Safran
Foer’s
novel,
the
shocking
pictures
of
9/11
are
meant
to
remind
the
reader
of
the
fact
that
children
are
confronted
with
the
same
current
or
worldly
events
and
that
children
are
also
confronted
in
an
unfiltered
way
with
adult
media
tailored
to
adult
understanding.
Moreover,
Elinor
Ochs
has
argued
that
‘a
story
may
be
told
across
a
sequence
of
pictures.’
Jonathan
Safran
Foer
uses
a
sequence
of
nearly
identical
pictures,
in
order
to
tell
the
story
of
Oskar’s
past
and
of
America’s
past.
Thus,
visual
images
can
(combine
and)
reduce
a
broader
narrative
to
a
minimum.
An
image
is
a
condensed
narrative
that
can
be
interpreted
in
a
broader
variety
of
ways,
than
words
written
on
a
page.
On
the
one
hand,
the
author
condenses
the
narrative
and
squeezes
it
into
a
single
shape.
On
the
other
hand,
the
author
unpacks
the
narrative
that
the
image
contains,
in
order
to
construct
a
new,
elaborate
narrative,
based
on
the
visual
representation
and
on
the
reader’s
understanding
of
the
image.
Additionally,
we
can
ask
the
question
whether
there
actually
should
be
a
world
especially
tailored
for
children’s
needs,
because
it
is
only
through
confrontation
with
reality
that
young
people
learn
how
to
deal
with
realism.
The
way
a
child
reacts
to
a
shocking
truth,
like
the
death
of
parent,
like
in
Jonathan
Safran
Foer’s
novel,
also
depends
on
the
options
the
child
is
given
to
process
an
experience.
In
Extremely
Loud
&
Incredibly
Close,
there
is
a
series
of
pictures
of
the
man
falling
from
the
Twin
Towers.
The
pictures
are
arranged
in
such
a
way
that
they
form
a
flipbook.
When
the
reader
flips
through
the
pages,
it
looks
like
the
man
in
the
pictures
is
not
falling
from
the
building,
but
ascending.
In
this
case,
the
author
has
managed
to
show
that
children
see
the
same
surroundings
as
adults,
but
that
young
people
manage
to
distort
reality
in
such
a
way
that
it
becomes
bearable.
Adult
imagination
is
stifled
and
limited
by
their
knowledge
of
what
is
physically
possible
or
impossible.
A
child’s
perspective
and
interpretation
of
the
world
helps
the
adult
reader
to
remember
how
to
fall
back
onto
his
creativity,
in
order
to
solve
problems
or
in
order
to
reconstruct
a
personal
identity.
Thus,
having
67
said
earlier
on
that
the
successful
processing
of
a
negative
experience
depends
on
the
person’s
surroundings
and
the
offered
support,
we
can
add
that
overcoming
grief
also
depends
on
one’s
own
ability
to
see
the
beneficial
or
comical
in
each
situation
and
to
grow
through
and
because
of
that
incident,
independent
of
a
person’s
age.
Moreover,
by
witnessing
how
challenging
the
everyday
world
is
for
other
people,
the
reader
comes
to
accept
his
own
personal
challenges
as
common
experiences.
The
reading
process
triggers
the
positive
psychological
effect
that
the
reader
learns
to
give
up
on
his
perfectionism,
even
if
the
narrator
is
a
child
and
when
it
is
accepted
for
children
to
find
the
world
challenging.
Most
important
is
that
there
is
a
human
being
facing
and
overcoming
a
challenge.
The
fact
that
it
is
a
child
becomes
secondary.
Elinor
Ochs
points
out
that
self-‐understandings
do
not
always
take
the
form
of
soothing
narrative
solutions
to
life’s
dilemmas.
Rather,
narratives
may
illuminate
life
as
we
know
it
by
raising
challenging
questions
and
exploring
them
from
multiple
angles.
Although
they
sometimes
deceive,
narrators
may
also
probe
beneath
the
surface
of
phenomena
and
take
interlocutors
on
an
“adventurous
journey
toward
a
deeper
understanding,
or
rather
to
a
new
and
deeper
question,
of
ourselves
in
the
world.”
While
narrative
does
not
yield
absolute
truth,
it
can
transport
narrators
and
audiences
to
more
authentic
feelings,
beliefs,
and
actions
and
ultimately
to
a
more
authentic
self.
(EO
23)
An
authentic
self,
as
Elinor
Ochs
describes
it,
does
not
only
imply
that
a
person
understands
his
surroundings
and
is
understood
by
his
environment,
but
being
authentic
also
means
that
a
person
knows
his
own
self
and
acts
upon
it.
The
reading
process
allows
each
individual
to
get
in
touch
with
different
life
experiences
and
truths
in
a
condensed
form.
A
life
is
too
short
in
order
to
personally
explore
all
life’s
adventures.
Thus,
reading
about
and
dealing
with
different
forms
of
realism,
even
if
it
is
a
fictive
reality,
allows
the
reader
to
get
to
know
his
preferences,
his
interests
and
his
reactions
better.
Thus,
the
reader’s
confrontation
with
a
child
narrator
grants
the
reader
access
to
an
additional
dimension
in
life;
a
dimension
that
people
tend
to
forget
or
to
deliberately
put
in
the
background,
because
at
some
point
we
need
to
act
like
adults
do
according
to
social
norm.
Yet,
in
order
to
live
an
authentic
life,
it
is
necessary
for
the
individual
to
confront
his
childhood
experiences
in
his
own
right
and
to
learn
from
the
past.
Reading
and
seeing
the
world
from
a
child
narrator’s
perspective
allows
the
reader
68
to
revisit
his
former
self
or
to
compare
his
past
self
to
a
different
child
version
and
to
reconstruct
his
adult
identity,
based
on
the
re-‐evaluated
conception
that
a
person
had
of
himself.
Another
advantage
of
having
a
child
narrator
is
that
children
are
less
influenced
and
their
actions
and
speech
are
less
restricted
by
social
norms
and
conventions.
A
child’s
way
of
life
is
uncluttered
by
adult
perception
and
thus,
the
child
observes
its
environment
unfiltered,
by
the
idea
of
what
one
should
observe
and
what
one
should
overlook,
according
to
stereotypical
social
conventions.
The
child
narrator
becomes
the
author’s
tool
that
allows
the
writer
to
point
out
and
comment
on
social
shortcomings.
In
that
situation,
the
reader
perceives
a
child
that
tries
to
make
sense
of
a
world
that
is
unknown
to
him,
whereas
an
adult
character
commenting
on
social
shortcomings
is
understood
as
overtly
critical
of
society.
A
child
is
still
protected
by
stereotypical
adult
assumptions.
Adults
believe
that
the
child
is
naïve
and
finds
it
challenging
to
understand
his
surrounding
world.
A
child
is
allowed
to
ask
questions,
whereas
an
adult
asking
questions
is
often
frowned
at
or
laughed
at
for
his
ignorance
or,
in
contrast,
for
his
intrusiveness.
Of
course,
children
can
also
take
their
environment
for
granted.
The
child
who
points
out
social
shortcomings
turns
unconsciously
into
a
moral
instance,
but
the
adult
reader
is
more
willing
to
accept
and
contemplate
the
child’s
words,
than
adult
criticism.
The
child’s
evaluation
of
the
situation
is
pronounced
without
any
judgment,
because
often
the
child
does
not
know
what
the
adult
words
or
thoughts
he
imitates
really
imply.
On
the
one
hand,
the
argument,
which
says
that
children
are
freer
to
express
themselves,
because
they
are
unaware
of
and
thus,
less
restricted,
by
conventions
and
social
norms,
is
true.
In
contrast
though,
children
are
more
easily
manipulated,
because
children
crave
their
surroundings’
attention.
Children
mirror
the
adult
world,
because
they
want
to
belong
to
the
group
and
gain
the
adults’
approval.
This
observation
leads
to
the
reader’s
insecurity,
because
an
adult
can
never
be
sure
whether
an
incident
narrated
by
a
child
is
a
pure
observation
or
whether
the
child
narrates
a
story
the
way
his
parents
would
narrate
it,
because
the
child
mirrors
his
surroundings
and
says
what
he
thinks
his
parents
would
like
to
hear.
69
On
the
other
hand,
every
narrative,
whether
told
from
a
child’s
or
an
adult’s
perspective,
is
influenced
by
the
desire
to
convince
or
impress
the
reader.
Consequently,
reality
is
often
twisted
to
such
an
extent
that
the
audience
buys
into
the
story’s
truthfulness.
Nobody
can
detach
himself
from
the
desire
to
partly
cater
for
what
we
deem
to
be
other
people’s
expectations
of
us.
Additionally,
the
child
is
also
unaware
that
the
situations
he
observes
are
amoral
or
ethically
doubtful.
According
to
Schapiro
Tamar,
the
point
is
merely
that,
in
general,
we
do
not
feel
bound
by
children’s
expressions
of
their
wills
in
the
same
way
that
we
feel
bound
by
adults’
expression
of
theirs.
Second,
we
tend
not
to
hold
children
responsible
for
what
they
do
in
the
same
way
that
we
hold
adults
responsible
for
their
actions.
This
is
no
to
say
that
we
don’t
hold
children
responsible
for
their
actions
in
any
sense.
But
the
knowledge
that
an
agent
is
a
child
rather
than
an
adult
often
promotes
us
to
modify
our
“reactive
attitudes”
toward
her.
An
adult
who
laughs
at
your
bald
spot
is
to
be
resented;
a
child
who
does
the
same
is
to
be
disciplined
–
at
least
insofar
as
you
decide
to
treat
her
as
a
child.
In
this
sense,
we
do
not
take
child
action
as
seriously
as
adult
action,
or,
rather,
we
do
not
take
it
seriously
in
the
same
way.
(TS
717)
In
the
beginning,
the
reader
thinks
that
the
child
narrator
is
the
puppet
of
the
writer.
The
narrator
transmits
the
message
of
the
author
and
the
child
in
the
novel
obeys
the
adult
writer’s
orders,
just
as
children
in
the
real
world
obey
their
elders.
However,
the
reader
is
unconscious
of
the
fact
that
he
himself
becomes
the
puppet
of
the
child
narrator,
who
becomes
the
puppeteer
of
his
readership.
If
we
as
readers
are
reluctant
to
listen
to
the
author’s
message,
let
us
say
in
a
TV
interview,
then
we
are
the
ones
absorbing
the
child
narrator’s
words
and
contemplating
his
ideas
during
the
reading
process
and
hence,
we
listen
to
the
author’s
hidden
criticism.
The
child’s
words
that
the
reader
does
not
take
seriously,
according
to
Shapiro
Tamara,
are
in
reality
the
words
of
an
adult
and
should
provoke
the
reader’s
reaction.
Of
course,
there
is
also
the
production
of
a
reaction,
but
the
reaction
to
a
child
narrator
is
different
than
that
to
an
adult
narrator,
although
the
word’s
source,
namely
the
author,
is
identical.
Moreover,
on
the
one
hand,
a
child’s
honesty
and
his
ability
to
criticize
his
environment
openly
on
the
grounds
of
honest
ignorance
make
the
child
character
more
vulnerable,
because
inferiority
in
understanding
and
education
make
people
and
characters
prone
to
criticism
and
deceit.
When
an
author
puts
his
own
child
character
in
an
inferior
position,
then
he
allows
the
reader
to
ignore
any
criticism
70
voiced
by
the
child,
because
the
reader
might
not
take
the
child
seriously
and
prefer
to
ignore
any
comments
and
to
discount
them
as
childish
and
unworthy
of
any
adult
attention,
because
the
reader
does
not
want
to
be
confronted
with
an
uncomfortable
reality.
Secondly,
another
positive
aspect
of
having
a
child
narrator
is
the
idea
that
the
author
attributes
a
voice
to
those
people
that
adopt
a
secondary
social
status
and
often
go
unheard.
Elinor
Ochs
remarks
that
‘narrative
also
interfaces
self
and
society,
constituting
a
crucial
resource
for
socializing
emotions,
attitudes,
and
identities,
developing
interpersonal
relationships,
and
constituting
membership
in
community’
(EO
19).
This
statement
sounds
stereotyped
and
banal,
because
in
our
modern
world
media
and
publicity
is
all
about
giving
a
voice
to
the
discarded
members
of
society.
Yet,
Elinor
Ochs’
statement
is
true,
when
we
look
at
the
idea
that
each
narrative
draws
people
and
worlds
closer
together.
The
reading
experience
allows
an
exchange
of
information
and
of
attitudes
and
thus,
the
reader
is
more
or
less
forced
to
adopt
a
perspective,
and
in
our
case
a
child
perspective,
contrasting
his
own.
In
the
case
of
a
book
written
from
a
child’s
perspective,
the
reader
automatically
forms
a
relation
with
the
child
character,
because
reader
and
narrator
regularly
meet
during
the
reading
process.
Consequently,
there
is
an
approximation
or
even
convergence
between
two
different
social
and
psychological
positions
that
take
place.
On
the
other
hand,
I
have
said
that
the
reader
is
more
or
less
forced
to
deal
with
a
worldview
different
to
his
own,
when
the
reader
picks
up
a
novel
narrated
from
a
child’s
perspective.
Of
course
the
reader
has
the
choice
to
discard
the
novel
that
he
has
chosen
and
decide
on
reading
another
text.
Yet,
the
reader’s
conscious
decision
against
the
confrontation
with
a
child’s
reality,
or
with
any
other
reality
that
does
not
correspond
with
his
own
worldview,
leads
to
a
debate
as
well.
When
a
reader
rejects
a
novel,
he
consciously
or
unconsciously
asks
himself,
why
the
book
did
not
appeal
to
him
and
by
asking
these
questions,
the
reader
is
also
discussing
and
analyzing
part
of
his
attitude
and
of
his
self.
Thus,
the
reading
process
and/
or
the
rejection
of
a
particular
type
of
novel
both
lead
to
a
confrontation
of
the
author
with
his
own
attitudes,
desires
and
points
of
view.
Additionally,
if
an
author
intends
to
give
a
voice
to
the
children
in
this
world,
who
go
without
a
say,
then
the
author
needs
to
make
sure
that
he
endows
71
his
child
narrator
with
an
authentic
childlike
voice
that
lacks
grammatical
accuracy
and
that
includes
the
ticks
of
the
child’s
age
group.
Of
course,
voice
is
more
than
tone
of
voice.
Voice
also
stands
for
the
words,
expressions
and
moments
in
time
a
character
uses
in
order
to
narrate
his
story.
The
advantage
of
attributing
an
adult
voice
to
a
child
character
is
that
mature
comments
are
sweetened,
by
childlike
expressions.
Children
invent
their
own
language
and
so
it
seems
only
adequate
that
an
insightful,
wise
comment
should
be
made
in
a
unique
tone
of
voice.
Matthew
Kneale
uses
a
specific
childlike
writing
style
to
support
the
voice
of
his
child
narrator
also
visually.
In
his
novel
When
We
Were
Romans,
Matthew
Kneale
disregards
adult
grammar
rules
and
spelling
for
the
benefit
of
visualizing
the
child’s
thoughts:
This
was
bad,
mum
was
scratching
her
arm
now,
so
I
thought
“I
must
help
her
or
she
will
fall
down
into
a
big
hole.”
Suddenly
I
really
hated
that
theif36,
I
wished
we
hadn’t
sat
in
a
row
because
then
I
would
have
seen
him,
I
would
have
shouted
out
really
loudly
and
frightened
him
away,
I
would
have
run
after
him
and
got
the
police
to
put
him
in
jail
forever,
I
would
blow
him
up,
I
would
do
a
Caligulla.
I
said
“wait
here
mum,
I
will
go
and
ask
Jeener”
so
I
ran
into
the
bar
really
fast,
but
it
didn’t
do
any
good,
she
didn’t
understand
me
because
she
could
only
speak
Italian,
she
just
put
up
her
hands
like
she
was
surrendering
and
said
“banyo?”
which
means
loo.
(MK
77)
On
the
one
hand,
this
paragraph
shows
that
children
can
convey
a
message
just
as
adequate
and
effectively
to
a
readership,
without
paying
attention
to
the
correctness
of
names
and
spelling.
Additionally,
the
narrator
invents
the
expression
‘to
Caligula
someone,’
and
even
if
a
reader
is
not
informed
about
the
context,
everyone
understands
by
the
tone
attributed
to
this
expressions
that
it
alludes
to
a
punishing
action.
Matthew
Kneale’s
text
also
highlights
that
at
some
point
in
the
reading
process
it
does
not
matter,
if
a
story
is
told
from
a
child’s
perspective
or
from
an
adult
perspective,
because
it
is
the
understanding
between
two
people
that
matters
and
not
their
age.
In
the
story,
the
Italian
waitress
cannot
understand
Lawrence,
because
she
just
speaks
Italian
and
he
English.
The
waitress
assumes
that
the
child
needs
to
go
to
the
bathroom.
Consequently,
the
story
highlights
people’s
expectations
of
each
other.
The
waitress
would
not
spontaneously
assume
36
The
spelling
mistakes
in
the
paragraphs
taken
from
When
We
Were
Romans
are
Matthew
Kneale’s
that
the
mother’s
handbag
was
robbed
and
that
the
child
is
now
in
charge
of
the
situation,
because
the
mother
is
too
baffled
and
confused
to
take
any
action.
Thus,
the
play
with
how
the
text
is
visually
portrayed
underlines
the
discrepancy
between
the
child’s
age
and
his
mature
way
of
thinking
and
acting.
In
stories
told
by
child
narrators,
the
child’s
voice
that
takes
over
the
narrative
indicates
that
the
adults
lack
the
words
or
the
power
to
transmit
their
message
or
any
message
at
all.
So
it
is
the
child
who
assumes
the
role
of
the
grown
up,
both
through
voice
and
action:
I
told
her
“give
me
that
piece
(sic)
of
paper
with
their
address,
give
me
the
guide
book”
and
she
did,
she
just
did
what
I
said,
I
think
it
was
because
she
was
sad.
I
tried
to
find
their
street
on
the
map
but
it
was
hard,
I
don’t
really
know
maps
and
the
streets
all
just
went
round
and
round
like
a
big
jumble.
So
I
thought
“uhih
what
will
I
do?”
then
I
thought
“I
know
I
will
ask
somebody.”
Mum
was
just
standing
there
not
looking
at
anything,
it
was
like
she
was
asleep
or
something,
so
I
went
in
a
bar
and
asked
the
man.
(MK
86/
87)
Although
Lawrence
is
trapped
in
an
unfamiliar
situation
with
a
mother
who
is
acting
really
strangely,
the
child
manages
to
overcome
his
reserve
and
approach
strangers
for
help,
even
though
he
does
not
speak
their
language.
If
an
author
chooses
to
put
a
child
at
the
centre
of
his
narrative,
the
writer
needs
to
make
sure
that
the
child
has
a
specific
voice
of
his
own
and
dares
to
act
independently,
when
the
adult
world
comes
to
a
stand
still.
Certainly,
unusual
situations
demand
unusual
behaviour
and
maybe
it
is
people’s
survival
instinct
that
drives
them
on,
when
there
is
looming
danger.
So,
maybe
it
is
too
exaggerated
to
say
that
the
child
is
taking
up
the
position
of
the
adult,
because
maybe
the
child
is
just
acting
naturally
conscientious,
when
the
family
is
confronted
with
a
dangerous
situation.
Yet,
what
we
can
say
is
that
Matthew
Kneale
manages
to
portray
the
decay
of
the
adult
world,
without
stifling
the
flow
of
his
narrative.
The
child
character
is
affected
by
the
events
in
the
story,
but
he
remains
enough
of
an
unaffected
outsider
to
comment
on
the
situation,
from
a
fresh
perspective
and
to
drive
the
story
on,
by
acting
independently.
If
a
family
drama
was
told
from
an
adult’s
point
of
view,
then
that
adult
would
need
to
be
an
omniscient
narrator
that
remains
outside
the
story,
in
order
for
the
narrative
to
continue
smoothly.
If
the
narrator
were
a
first
person
narrator
and
involved
in
the
relationship
drama,
then
the
characters’
speechlessness,
when
confronted
with
their
lives’
disaster,
could
not
be
73
conveyed
as
truthfully
as
possible,
since
the
characters
would
need
to
voice
their
feelings
or
points
of
view.
In
When
We
Were
Romans,
the
mother
going
insane
is
much
better
portrayed
through
Lawrence’s
eyes,
because
the
child
observes
the
gradual
decay,
without
fully
being
able
to
grasp
its
extent.
This
situation
or
observation
allows
the
growth
of
suspense
within
the
story,
because
the
reader
really
senses
the
mother’s
silence
as
the
expression
of
helplessness
and
confusion,
which
it
is.
Moreover,
a
majority
of
the
children
that
remain
unheard
by
society
are
mostly
those
children
that
grow
up
in
poverty
and
that
cannot
enjoy
a
proper
education.
Consequently,
if
an
author
wants
to
give
an
authentic
voice
to
socially
deprived
children,
then
the
author
needs
to
take
into
account
language
ticks
or
expressions
that
belong
and
identify
lower
social
classes.
The
author’s
dilemma
highlights
the
child’s
inferiority
even
more.
Yet,
Tanner
Tony
suggests
that
while
Henry
James
‘could
not
content
himself
with
the
poverty
and
simplicity
of
a
child’s
“producible
vocabulary”
[…]
Clemens
saw
that
such
unliterary
approximations
might
be
made
to
yield
a
new
lyrical
intensity,
made
to
hit
a
new
note
of
emotional
accuracy
and
sincerity’
(TT
209).
Samuel
Clemens,
better
known
as
Mark
Twain,
is
right
by
pointing
out
the
accurate
observational
dimension
that
a
child’s
linguistic
lack
can
add
to
the
narrative.
Through
the
narrator’s
language,
the
reader
can
identify
which
social
class
and
which
age
group
the
narrator
belongs
to.
Language
identifies
people
and
links
them
to
their
background.
Consequently,
Clemens
is
right
when
he
says
that
the
accurate
use
of
specific
language
features
yields
an
emotional
dimension,
because
language
discloses
a
person’s
background
and
upbringing
and
hence,
exposes
his
emotional
roots.
Moreover,
everyone
has
already
been
confronted
with
a
situation
that
left
him
speechless.
Yet,
while
an
adult
struggles
to
find
the
right
words
to
express
his
distress,
a
child
remains
accurately
and
appropriately
silent,
because
that
is
the
way
of
expression
he
is
forcibly
used
to,
because
he
lacks
the
accurate
words
anyway.
Thus,
the
child
arrives
at
accepting
and
mirroring
the
situation,
which
he
has
to
deal
with,
in
a
more
accurate
way
than
an
adult,
because
of
current
developmental
shortcomings.
In
that
respect,
the
child’s
linguistic
disadvantage
turns
into
a
poetical
asset.
Moreover,
Tony
Tanner
points
out
that
74
if
we
push
a
little
deeper
for
the
difference
between
James
and
Clemens,
we
can
see
that
James
disliked
the
vernacular
because
it
was
the
expression
of
an
area
of
society
fundamentally
uncivilized.
Clemens
knew
this
area
well
and
say
artistic
needs
and
potentialities
where
James
discerned
only
barbarism.
(TT
209)
Nowadays,
children
are
more
and
more
encouraged
to
make
up
their
own
mind
and
to
become
autonomous,
in
acting
and
in
thinking,
which
means
that
there
is
no
real
need
to
create
a
platform,
where
children
defend
their
needs,
because
they
already
have
a
say
of
their
own
and
parents,
teachers,
politicians
and
psychologists
hear
the
young
people
anyway.
Yet,
this
positive
social
development
remains
still
a
phenomenon,
which
is
limited
to
developed
and
educated
societies,
like
in
Henry
James’
times.
Socially
and
financially
challenged
people
do
not
have
the
time
or
energy
to
listen
to
and
fulfil
all
of
their
offspring’s
dreams
and
needs.
Thus,
Mark
Twain
is
right
in
his
observation
that
there
is
potential
talent
slumbering
in
those
people
that
cannot
afford
to
spend
time
on
the
refinement
of
their
linguistic
abilities,
whether
they
are
adults
or
children.
In
that
respect,
expressing
the
world
in
such
a
way
that
it
corresponds
with
one’s
daily
experiences
is
also
an
artistic
expression,
because
it
preserves
the
social
authenticity
that
so
many
artists
strive
to
create
or
integrate
in
their
work.
In
this
respect,
it
remains
a
timeliness
to
address
social
problems
from
a
child’s
perspective,
because
the
child
reflects
his
reality
the
way
it
is,
by
using
the
linguistic
and
behaviourist
patterns
that
he
is
confronted
with
on
a
daily
basis.
Topics
like
prostitution,
financial
hardship
and
violence
are
considered
as
problems
created
by
adults
and
as
being
solved
by
adults.
Authors
like
Romain
Gary
or
Jonathan
Safran
Foer
though,
illustrate
the
feelings
or
experience
of
children
living
in
socially
challenging
situations,
by
discussing,
accessing,
and
deciphering
them
from
a
child’s
vantage
point.
Drawing
attention
to
the
child’s
minor
status
in
society
helps
to
interest
people
in
situations
demanding
improvement
and
motivates
the
reader
to
act
in
a
supportive
way,
given
that
the
novel’s
message
is
poignant,
truthful
and
shocking
enough
to
call
forth
the
reader’s
compassion
and
make
him
act
upon
his
feelings.
In
that
case,
children
benefit,
when
a
book
is
written
from
a
child’s
perspective,
because
readers
could
be
motivated
enough
to
create
foundations,
to
make
donations
or
to
invest
at
least
more
time
looking
more
closely
at
the
silent
suffering
of
the
young
people
surrounding
him,
in
order
to
help
children
in
need
75
At
the
same
time,
the
author
can
also
benefit
when
he
draws
the
readers’
attention
to
the
current
deficits
in
childcare,
because
social
engagement
attracts
social
recognition
and
public
approval.
The
author’s
positive
public
status
has
repercussions
on
the
number
of
books
he
sells
and
on
how
any
criticism
towards
him
is
voiced.
In
turn,
the
author’s
high
social
status
helps
him
to
connect
with
people,
who
are
influential
enough
to
create
foundations
or
to
raise
money,
in
order
to
help
children
in
need.
Thus,
an
author,
who
focuses
on
children’s
needs
and
enlightens
his
contemporary
world
about
children’s
social
shortcomings,
lays
the
foundation
for
personal
and
social
profit
and
success.
On
the
one
hand,
this
positive
effect
is
beneficial
for
the
growing
appeal
of
fiction.
On
the
other
hand,
the
author
uses
a
child
narrator
under
the
pretext
of
attributing
a
voice
to
those
unheard.
In
that
situation,
the
child
turns
yet
again
out
to
be
abused
by
the
adult,
in
order
for
the
adult
to
reach
his
literary
or
social
target.
It
is
of
secondary
matter,
if
the
author
was
genuinely
interested
in
drawing
positive
attention
to
the
child’s
status
in
society
and
to
the
child’s
worldview.
The
aftertaste
that
remains
is
that
of
a
child
abused
by
an
adult
for
the
transmission
of
an
adult’s
message
in
the
world
of
the
grown-‐ups.
If
we
were
pessimistic,
we
would
say
that
the
child
remains
the
weakest
link
in
society
and
is
prone
to
adult
abuse,
independently
of
the
adult’s
intention.
Another
asset,
which
enhances
the
appeal
of
adult
books
featuring
a
child
narrator,
is
that
every
reader
can
relate
to
a
child’s
feelings,
because
we
were
all
once
children.
As
Rudyard
Kipling
writes:
there
is
only
one
way
of
understanding
children;
they
cannot
be
understood
by
imagination,
or
observation,
nor
even
by
love.
They
can
only
be
understood
by
memory
…
I
was
a
child
once
myself,
and
by
some
fortunate
chance
I
remember
exactly
how
I
used
to
feel
and
think
about
things.37
Rudyard
Kipling
is
certainly
right
when
he
says
that,
in
general,
all
children
learn
to
explore
and
understand
the
world
in
a
similar
way.
However,
there
is
the
difference
in
upbringing
and
in
social
setting
that
create
a
divergence
in
the
way
children
perceive
and
experience
the
world.
Accordingly,
everyone
can
understand
37
Knoepflmacher,
U.C.
“The
Balancing
of
Child
and
Adult:
An
Approach
to
Victorian
Fantasies
for
Children.”
Nineteenth-Century
Fiction
37.4
(Mar.
1983):
497-‐530,
499
–
Further
references
are
included
in
the
text
(UCK).
76
the
behaviour
and
learning
curve
of
children
that
grow
up
in
more
or
less
similar
circumstances
as
oneself,
but
to
say
that
every
adult
reader
can
relate
to
every
child’s
behaviour
and
attitude,
within
each
context,
is
exaggerated.
It
is
the
same
as
if
we
would
say
that
every
adult
must
understand
all
the
other
adults,
because
we
are
all
grown-‐ups.
However,
everybody
knows
from
experience
that
this
general
mutual
understanding
is
utopian
and
a
far
cry
from
reality.
Yet,
when
the
reader
is
confronted
with
the
fully
developed
character
of
an
adult
narrator,
with
all
his
ticks
and
whims,
then
only
a
limited
set
of
readers
can
identify
with
that
specific
character.
Children’s
characters
on
the
contrary
are
less
developed,
easier
to
deal
with
and
the
reader
has
a
general
notion
of
the
inconsistency
and
babbling
that
he
needs
to
expect,
when
confronted
with
a
child.
Of
course,
this
is
a
generalization,
because
there
are
also
young
people,
who
display
a
complex
character
and
a
fully
developed
attitude,
in
relation
to
their
environment.
In
the
case,
where
a
child
narrator
has
a
fully
developed
character,
because
that’s
the
way
the
author
wants
to
present
his
narrator,
the
author
can
create
such
a
childhood
setting
for
his
character
that
the
reader
is
coaxed
to
feel
even
sympathy
for
a
nasty
child
character.
The
reader
criticizes
an
adult
narrator,
who
behaves
inappropriately,
and
who
has
a
malevolent
character,
because
people
instinctively
feel
that
everybody
is
responsible
for
their
own
destiny
as
soon
as
we
are
grown
up,
even
if
we
have
had
a
difficult
childhood.
Finally,
when
the
novel
is
narrated
from
a
child’s
perspective,
the
two,
reader
and
writer,
get
the
chance
to
revisit
their
own
childhood.
Even
if
the
reader
has
a
different
social
background
and
a
different
life
experience
than
the
child
narrator,
as
discussed
in
the
preceding
paragraph,
reading
about
a
child’s
experiences
and
history
still
triggers
memories
of
one’s
own
childhood
and
leads
to
a
settlement
of
past
events.
Retracing
past
events
helps
people
with
coming
to
terms
with
one’s
own
childhood.
Additionally,
the
author,
too,
can
have
a
similar
psychologically
cleaning
experience,
when
he
writes
from
an
adult’s
perspective
about
past
experiences.
However,
the
advantage
in
employing
a
child
narrator
is
that
writing
about
a
child
creates
the
necessary
distance
between
past
experience
and
one’s
current
life
as
a
grown-‐up.
At
the
time
of
the
writing
process,
the
author
is
an
adult
and
he
feels
more
at
ease,
because
he
can
put
his
present
persona
in
the
foreground,
if
the
77
reader
or
a
critic
attempt
to
compare
him
with
his
characters
and
to
draw
a
parallel
between
the
author’s
childhood
and
his
fictive
character.
If
the
writer
creates
adult
characters
then
there
is
a
tendency
that
the
reader
or
a
reviewer
understands
the
author’s
text
as
a
biographical
processing
of
information,
which
deflects
the
reader’s
attention
away
from
the
novel’s
actual
message
and
veers
the
reader’s
awareness
to
the
author’s
private
life.
Elinor
Ochs
comments
that
every
telling
provides
narrators
and
listener/readers
with
an
opportunity
for
fragmented
self-‐understanding.
Each
telling
of
a
narrative
situated
in
time
and
space
engages
only
facets
of
narrator’s
or
listener/
reader’s
selfhood
in
that
it
evokes
only
certain
memories,
concerns,
and
expectations.
In
that
sense,
narratives
are
apprehended
by
partial
selves,
and
narratives
so
apprehended
access
only
fragments
of
experience.
Marcel
Proust
captures
this
insight
in
writing,
“it
is
only
in
one
small
section
of
the
complete
idea
we
have
of
[a
person]
that
we
are
capable
of
feeling
emotion;
indeed
it
is
only
in
one
small
section
of
the
complete
idea
he
has
of
himself
that
he
is
capable
of
feeling
any
emotion
either.”
(EO
22)
When
reading
a
novel,
it
can
be
one
small
passage
or
one
small
experience
that
the
narrator
shares,
which
allows
the
reader
to
feel
one
with
the
narrator.
At
the
same
time,
one
incident
in
the
story
can
grant
the
reader
an
insight
in
the
author’s
psyche
and
emotional
aura.
In
a
way,
small
fragments
of
language,
like
single
words
or
short
sentences,
can
suffice
to
bring
two
people,
in
our
case,
reader
and
narrator
or
reader
and
author
closer
together.
Language
helps
people
to
realize
that
we
share
a
common
reality
and
that
our
understanding
of
each
other
depends
on
our
ability
to
accurately
express
what
we
mean.
Consequently,
it
is
only
logical
to
me
that
writers
have
come
up
with
different
art
forms,
like
poems,
short
stories,
and
so
on,
and
with
different
versions
of
narrators,
in
order
to
amplify
the
possibility
of
being
accurately
understood,
by
their
readership.
If
an
author
fails
to
touch
his
audience
at
heart,
by
writing
from
an
adult
perspective,
he
might
resort
to
creating
a
child
character
and
if
that
fails
also
an
elderly
narrator,
in
order
to
speak
to
a
broader
variety
of
readers.
Yet,
an
author
can
also
be
very
talented
and
manage
to
create
convincing
narrators
from
all
walks
of
life.
Thus,
in
the
end,
the
child
narrator
is
basically
just
another
form
of
expression
or
a
vehicle,
which
allows
the
transmission
of
meaning.
In
that
respect,
the
importance
of
the
child
is
made
redundant,
because
only
the
fact
that
a
message
adopts
a
different
form
is
relevant
and
not
the
idea,
which
form
exactly
that
is.
78
Additionally,
another
practical
aspect
that
comes
to
mind
when
one
thinks
of
an
advantage
that
a
child
narrator
can
bring
about
is
the
fact
that
the
child
will
grow
up
one
day.
So,
when
the
author
creates
a
child
character,
he
lays
at
the
same
time
the
basis
for
the
creation
of
future
novels,
which
focus
on
the
growth
and
development
of
the
same
character.
If
the
character
is
an
old
man
to
start
off
with,
then
the
author
can
write
about
his
past
life,
his
experiences
and
later
on,
about
his
children
or
grandchildren,
but
at
the
expense
of
the
emotional
and
psychological
growth
of
the
same
character
throughout
a
series
of
books.
When
there
is
a
child
character
to
start
off
with
though,
the
novel
can
have
a
sequel.
On
the
other
hand,
the
gradual
development
of
the
main
character
and
his
coming-‐off-‐age
means
loosing
his
childlike
character
that
the
narrator
used
to
portray
in
the
very
first
novel
and
his
original
voice
that
constituted
the
unique
appeal
for
the
reader.
Of
course,
those
readers,
who
enjoy
reading
novels
featuring
child
narrators,
do
not
read
any
sequels,
where
the
child
narrator
is
a
grown-‐up.
Yet,
readers
who
are
mainly
attracted
by
the
specific
genre
of
novels
narrated
by
child
characters,
might
start
to
find
a
liking
in
adult
characters,
when
they
start
following
their
child
narrator’s
growth
and
coming-‐off-‐age.
At
the
same
time,
when
a
series
of
novels
starts
loosing
its
appeal
to
readers,
who
prefer
child
narrators,
because
the
child
narrator
has
turned
into
an
adult,
then
the
same
series
attracts
a
different
readership,
which
enjoys
reading
narratives
by
adults.
In
that
case,
the
author
keeps
the
same
amount
of
readers,
while
altering
his
target
readership.
This
change
in
audience
has
a
positive
effect,
if
we
consider
that
the
author’s
message
reaches
a
broader
variety
of
people
from
different
social
backgrounds
and
with
different
interests.
Still,
if
we
assume
that
an
author
creates
a
series
of
books
throughout
which
the
main
child
character
grows
physically,
emotionally
and
psychologically,
we
also
need
to
assume
that
the
author
masters
the
ability
to
create
a
convincing
and
complex
adult
narrator.
An
advantage
for
the
author
in
terms
of
child
narrators
is
that
child
characters
are
generally
less
complex
and
less
emotionally
and
psychologically
developed,
than
adult
characters.
Of
course,
this
observation
is
a
generalization
and
the
complexity
of
a
person
depends
on
his
background,
upbringing
and
experiences
in
life.
Yet,
the
observation
that
the
character’s
development
depends
on
his
experiences
in
life,
explains
the
challenge
of
creating
79
and
writing
about
adult
characters.
When
an
author
wants
to
create
a
convincing
adult
character
or
narrator,
the
writer
needs
to
find
explanations
for
the
character’s
behaviour
by
inventing
and
writing
about
background
situations
and
past
events
that
have
formed
his
character’s
personality.
A
child
narrator
in
contrast
is
easier
to
portray,
because
the
reader
assumes
that
the
child
moulds
his
worldview
according
to
the
way
in
which
the
adults
surrounding
him
influence
his
thinking.
The
child
character
has
less
life
experience
to
draw
from
and
less
linguistic
resources,
so
the
child
narrator
repeats
what
he
hears.
The
adult
narrator
imitates
his
surrounding
too,
but
he
has
more
experience
to
fall
back
onto
and
to
compare
other
people’s
opinion
and
behaviour
to
his
new
experiences
and
thus,
can
approach
life
with
the
necessary,
but
more
critical
distance,
than
a
child.
However,
the
gradual
development
of
a
child
character
into
an
adult
character,
respecting
the
general
truthful
psychological
development
of
a
person’s
nature,
according
to
his
circumstances,
is
a
challenge
for
any
author.
Children
change
rapidly,
so
it
is
easier
to
define
a
child’s
learning
curve,
than
an
adult’s,
because
adults
are
more
reluctant
to
transform.
Accordingly,
a
child
growing
more
mature
throughout
a
novel,
or
who
is
acting
on
a
whim,
seems
more
natural,
than
an
adult
who
suddenly
re-‐evaluates
his
previous
attitude
and
way
of
thinking.
Hence,
for
the
author
it
is
an
advantage,
if
he
sticks
with
the
elaboration
of
child
characters
and
deepens
his
observation
and
portrayal
of
children,
so
that
his
characters
become
more
lifelike
and
convincing,
from
one
novel
to
the
other,
because
a
child’s
character
is
formed
by
his
current
circumstances,
whereas
an
adult’s
nature
is
based
on
his
past,
present,
and
on
the
future
life
he
is
trying
to
create.
Yet,
we
need
to
agree
with
U.C.
Knopflmacher
according
to
whom,
‘torn
between
the
opposing
demands
of
innocence
and
experience,
the
author
who
resorts
to
the
wishful
thinking
of
the
child
nonetheless
feels
compelled,
in
varying
degrees,
to
hold
on
to
the
grown-‐up’s
circumscribed
notions
about
reality’
(UCK
499).
The
critic
is
of
course
right
to
point
out
that
an
author
needs
to
reproduce
adult
reality
to
some
degree
in
his
work,
because
the
author
knows
who
his
target
audience
is
and
consequently,
the
writer
formulates
his
text
in
such
a
way
that
his
reader
can
understand
the
novel’s
message.
In
that
respect,
the
content
and
the
novel’s
core
message
are
more
important
than
the
child’s
authenticity.
However,
80
when
we
notice
that
the
author
does
not
strive
to
portray
a
realistic
child
character,
but
rather
concentrates
on
his
narrative,
we
need
to
wonder
why
the
author
still
uses
a
child
character,
instead
of
an
adult
narrator.
Of
course,
a
combination
of
the
child’s
appeal,
like
his
innocence,
his
ability
to
question
events
and
many
more
positive
aspects
like
mentioned
before,
make
the
author’s
text
attractive
in
addition
to
the
novel’s
message.
Additionally,
it
is
hard
to
define
an
authentic
child’s
character,
because
children’s
psychological
and
emotional
development
depends
on
the
outer
circumstances
and
on
individual
character.
So,
it
is
also
hard
to
locate
and
criticize
if
an
author
has
managed
to
portray
a
realistic
child
or
not.
In
a
coming-‐off-‐age
novel,
a
transformation
is
happening.
The
child
narrator
is
growing
older
and
developing
emotionally,
socially,
psychologically
and
physically.
Yet,
at
the
same
time
the
reader
and
author
are
also
evolving.
Consequently,
at
the
end
of
the
story,
the
narrator,
the
reader
and
the
author
have
discovered
and
developed
the
novel
and
their
own
life
story
simultaneously.
The
evolutionary
effect
of
the
story
would
be
preserved,
if
an
adult
narrator
told
the
story.
The
difference
between
an
adult
narrator
and
a
child
narrator
is
though
that
the
development
of
a
child
narrator
is
more
obvious,
because
a
child’s
learning
curve
is
steeper,
as
highlighted
earlier
on.
Consequently,
the
child’s
obvious
development
helps
the
reader
to
note,
appreciate
and
understand
his
own
personal
growth,
because
the
sensation
of
evolution
and
progress
is
more
apparent
or
nearly
palpable
in
the
child
narrator.
Furthermore,
a
child’s
narrative
includes
the
positive
aspect
of
natural
truthfulness,
because
children
are
generally
not
calculating.
Whatever
a
child
says
is
commonly
blurted
out,
without
any
second
thought
or
hidden
agenda.
Of
course,
this
observation
is
an
oversimplification,
because
there
are
children,
who
are
already
manipulative
and
calculating,
at
a
very
young
age.
Usually
though,
young
people
are
straightforward,
say
what
is
on
their
mind
and
answer
questions
honestly.
In
fact,
research
has
shown
that
children
find
it
challenging
to
control
their
body
language,
whenever
they
are
lying.
So,
when
a
child
is
untruthful,
he
quickly
puts
his
hands
in
front
of
his
mouth
or
hides
them
behind
his
back.
These
indications
help
the
adult
and
reader
to
identify,
when
a
child
is
lying.
Of
course,
this
method
only
works
when
the
text
reveals
the
child’s
body
language
or
when
81
there
are
other
clues
in
the
text
that
identify
the
child
narrator’s
reality
as
different
from
other
characters’
reality.
Still,
children’s
truthfulness
is
advantageous
for
the
author,
because
the
author
can
be
more
lenient
in
the
creation
of
his
characters,
because
when
his
child
narrator
says
or
does
something
that
does
not
fit
into
the
linear
development
of
the
novel
or
that
is
irrelevant
to
the
story,
then
the
reader
will
not
doubt
the
author’s
talent
in
creating
a
deliberate
story
and
plot.
The
reader
assumes
that
the
author
intends
the
child
character
to
act
according
to
his
whims
and
to
comment
on
any
observation,
whether
it
is
relevant
in
relation
to
the
story
or
not.
In
When
We
Were
Romans,
the
child
narrator,
for
example,
comments
on
his
environment
and
describes
the
people
he
meets
in
detail,
while
the
focus
of
the
story
is
on
the
mother’s
mental
derangement.
An
adult
character
would
have
focused
more
on
the
woman’s
behaviour,
than
on
external
events.
For
the
young
boy
though,
their
trip
to
Rome
is
more
captivating,
than
the
mother,
whose
behaviour
he
is
unable
to
interpret.
In
Matthew
Kneale’s
story,
the
reader
notices
that
children
focus
on
those
things
in
their
surroundings
that
they
manage
to
understand
and
to
comprehend.
Accordingly,
when
an
author
uses
a
child
narrator
to
comment
on
shortcomings,
this
procedure
is
more
subtle
than
pointing
out
characters’
deficiencies
right
away.
Child
characters
omit
mentioning
those
things
that
they
cannot
digest
or
they
marginally
comment
on
them.
This
behaviour
points
out
other
characters’
shortcomings
without
addressing
them
directly.
Of
course,
an
adult
narrator
could
also
ignore
the
mother’s
mental
instability
and
focus
on
the
Italian
scenery.
However,
in
that
case,
the
reader
would
wonder
which
kind
of
psychological
development
the
adult
narrator
has
that
prevents
him
from
noticing
the
mother’s
mental
decline.
Thus,
in
that
situation,
the
narrator
would
attract
the
reader’s
attention,
while
the
story’s
message
would
be
circumcised.
Additionally,
the
text’s
message
would
alter
altogether,
if
an
adult
narrator
told
the
story,
because
discussing
an
adult
relationship
is
different
from
portraying
and
analyzing
child-‐parent
interaction.
If
we
assume
that
the
child
narrator
is
mostly
truthful
and
relates
his
environment
in
the
way
he
observes
the
people
and
events
surrounding
him,
then
the
narrative
turns
more
into
an
observation
report
or
a
documentary,
than
into
a
82
fictive
story.
The
child
narrator
is
an
eyewitness,
who
is
not
involved
in
the
discussion
and
he
does
not
have
to
take
any
decisions.
The
reader
sees
what
the
narrator
is
seeing,
but
the
reader
adopts
a
superior
position,
because
the
reader
is
left
to
judge
and
to
develop
his
own
opinion.
The
child
observer
and
narrator
only
proposes
the
facts
and
the
outside
world
as
he
sees
them.
Tanner
Tony
explains
that
‘the
“small
expanding
consciousness”
is
more
importantly
present
as
a
“register
of
impressions,”
but
it
is
only
one
of
many
such
registers,
more
pathetic,
more
idealistic
than
the
others
perhaps,
but
in
the
long
run
not
necessarily
more
reliable’
(TT
207).
The
adult
reader
is
free
to
construct
and
interpret
the
child’s
words,
according
to
his
own
understanding
and
worldview.
The
reader
can
project
his
personal
reality
into
the
novel.
On
the
other
hand,
the
reading
experience
becomes
more
challenging,
because
attributing
more
depth
to
a
novel,
by
interpreting
the
text
on
a
personal
basis
also
depends
on
the
reader’s
ability
to
fall
back
onto
personal
experience
and
to
have
the
ability
to
question
descriptions
and
portrayal
of
events.
If
the
text
remains
without
the
reader’s
ability
for
interpretation,
then
the
novel
remains
on
a
basic
level,
because
the
child’s
logic
is
less
complex
and
varies
from
adult
logic.
Moreover,
the
fact
that
children
have
less
responsibility
for
themselves
and
for
other
people,
frees
them
more
time
to
observe
their
surroundings
and
to
point
out
social
shortcomings.
In
When
We
Were
Romans,
Lawrence
observes
Then
Franseen
started
asking
mum
all
about
dad,
so
I
thought
“uhoh,
be
carefull
(sic),
don’t
forget
Jemima.”
She
wasn’t
doing
the
pots
this
time,
that
was
lucky,
she
was
watching
telly
in
Italian
instead,
there
was
a
man
with
a
tiny
beard
asking
questions
and
some
ladies
standing
in
a
line
just
wearing
their
underpants,
but
she
was
listening
to
us,
I
could
tell,
her
eyes
looked
round
at
us
sometimes,
so
I
thought
“don’t
make
her
go
off
like
an
airaid
siren
again.”
(MK
62)
Adults
ignore
or
overlook
detail,
whereas
children
have
the
time
to
really
‘see.’
On
the
one
hand,
Lawrence
is
‘free’
to
observe
his
sister’s
behaviour,
because
he
remains
an
outsider
to
the
adult
discussion.
Additionally,
Lawrence
is
closer
in
age
to
Jemima,
than
any
of
the
other
adults,
so
the
boy
still
remembers
how
he
used
to
act
around
adults
and
how
he
used
to
listen
in
on
their
conversations.
Children
are
also
less
used
to
theatrics
than
adults
and
children
are
more
powerless
to
stop
other
people
from
behaving
in
a
disturbing
way.
So,
Lawrence
is
more
sensitive
to
a
potential
tantrum
of
his
sister’s.
Yet,
whatever
circumstance
83
allows
Lawrence
to
observe,
what
the
adults
in
this
scene
fail
to
detect,
Lawrence’s
comment
still
highlights
that
children
as
young
as
they
might
be
are
able
to
observe
and
assimilate
adult
behaviour.
Children
might
lack
the
necessary
experience
to
process
what
the
words
or
behaviour
that
they
are
witnessing
mean,
but
children
assimilate
their
environment
according
to
their
worldview.
Larry
Wolff
quotes
Rousseau
in
his
research.
He
says
that
Jean-‐Jacques
‘Rousseau
urged
the
reader
to
select
with
care
the
objects
surrounding
a
child,
since
“everything
that
surrounds
him
is
the
book
in
which,
unconsciously
(…),
he
continually
enriches
his
memory
while
waiting
for
his
judgment
to
be
able
to
profit
from
it.’38
Rousseau
argues
that
a
child
is
unable
to
make
sense
of
the
world
surrounding
him
straight
away.
In
that
situation,
the
reader
is
challenged
to
make
sense
of
the
world
instead
of
the
child.
The
child
narrator
creates
the
necessary
affective
situation,
by
appealing
to
the
reader’s
sympathy
and
the
effect
is
that
the
reader
constructs
his
own
understanding
of
the
novel
and
completes
the
child’s
narrative
with
his
own
adult
imagination
and
background
knowledge.
Consequently,
there
is
simultaneous
creation
of
distance
and
proximity
between
the
reader
and
the
child
narrator.
The
reader
feels
superior
to
the
child
narrator,
because
he
can
interpret
the
facts
that
the
child
presents
and
is
in
a
better
position
to
ponder
the
narrator’s
words
and
to
take
them
at
face
value
or
to
alter
them,
in
order
to
create
valid
explanations
for
the
other
characters’
behaviour
and
attitude.
On
the
other
hand,
the
reader
and
child
narrator
approach
each
other,
because
the
reader
feels
responsible
for
the
child
character
and
they
both
share
in
the
secret
of
observing
other
people.
The
reader
sees
behind
the
scenes,
because
he
can
read
between
the
lines
and
interpret
the
child’s
global
situation.
The
appeal
to
the
reader’s
responsibility
is
only
generated
when
there
is
a
child
narrator
at
the
centre
of
the
novel.
If
the
main
character
were
an
adult,
then
the
adult
reader
would
still
form
a
relationship
with
the
narrator,
but
a
less
intimate
one.
The
reader
could
understand
the
adult
character
better,
even
not
necessarily,
but
the
reader
would
not
feel
superior
anymore,
because
the
adult
character
can
make
sense
of
his
own
surroundings
and
the
reader
feels
no
need
to
protect
his
character
from
any
harm
that
he
is
not
aware
of.
Blodgett
Harriet
comments
that
38
Wolff,
Larry.
“When
I
Imagine
a
Child:
The
Idea
of
Childhood
and
the
Philosophy
of
Memory
in
‘the
narrator
addresses
all
manner
of
readers
in
turn,
keeping
them
involved
with
the
theme.
Although
the
characters
are
undeniably
responsible
for
their
personal
misdeeds,
society
supplied
the
corrupting
worldly
atmosphere.
Perpetually,
the
narrator
prods
the
public
conscience’
(GR
35).
When
a
child
is
accepted
as
he
is
and
not
criticized
for
acting
aggressively
or
evil,
then
the
responsibility
is
taken
away
from
the
child.
Yet,
somebody
must
be
responsible
for
the
child’s
foul
mood
and
so
society
is
encouraged
to
question
their
attitude,
behaviour,
and
education
of
children.
In
The
Life
Before
Us,
Momo
describes
what
life
is
like
in
Parisian
boarding
houses
for
orphans
or
children
of
prostitutes.
Those
houses
are
also
run
by
prostitutes,
while
their
colleagues
are
at
work:
‘Take
Madame
Sophie,
who
keeps
another
illegal
nursery
on
the
rue
Surcouf,
or
the
one
they
call
the
Comtesse
because
her
name
is
the
widow
Comte.
Well,
sometimes
they’ve
got
as
many
as
ten
day
boarders,
and
the
first
thing
they
do
is
stuff
them
full
of
tranquilizers’
(GR
35).
In
this
case,
Momo
can
observe
what
is
going
on
in
his
surroundings,
without
having
any
responsibility
to
take
appropriate
action
in
altering
the
children’s
situation.
Momo
is
too
young
to
interfere
and
to
help
those
children
who
are
drugged,
in
order
to
keep
them
still.
If
there
were
an
adult
narrator,
then
the
adult
character
would
need
to
take
action
and
to
try
and
change
the
course
of
events.
In
that
case,
the
whole
plot
would
change
and
the
purpose
of
the
novel
would
be
lost
or
at
least
be
altered
and
turn
into
a
different
story.
In
Momo’s
case,
the
narrator
presents
the
facts
to
the
reader
and
the
reader
has
to
decide
for
himself,
how
he
would
react
if
he
were
confronted
with
a
situation
like
Momo’s.
In
Momo’s
case,
the
reader
is
challenged
to
make
up
his
own
mind,
to
think
about
social
issues
and
to
come
up
with
a
solution,
because
Momo
is
too
young
to
think
of
a
solution
himself.
Blodgett
Harriet
notes
that
the
child
narrator
is
meant
to
‘make
mankind
smile
wryly
even
while
shifting
about
uncomfortably”
(HB
214).
Momo
does
come
up
with
his
own
solutions
to
his
own
personal
problems.
Yet,
those
resolutions
are
short-‐term
remedies
that
guarantee
Momo
survival,
but
which
lack
the
long
term
view
that
adults
possess
and
which
would
help
him
to
settle
his
situation
in
a
more
comforting
way,
for
a
longer
period
of
time.
If
the
main
character
was
a
grown
up
and
if
that
person
would
take
no
action,
then
the
reader
would
accept
the
character’s
decision
or
reject
it,
but
his
mind
would
not
be
challenged
as
much
to
85
rummage
for
a
solution,
because
the
adult
character
proposes
a
potential
solution
or
attitude,
in
times
of
hardship.
Yet,
the
idea
that
the
reader
is
challenged
into
taking
action
or
into
getting
involved,
at
least
emotionally
and
intellectually
with
the
situation
that
he
is
witnessing,
only
works
if
the
reader
readily
accepts
Momo’s
description
of
his
life
as
a
truthful
and
factual
account.
As
soon
as
the
reader
starts
to
question
the
character’s
authenticity
and
reliability,
then
the
novel
loses
its
central
message
and
appeal.
Still,
I
would
say
that
the
reader’s
acceptance
of
the
novel’s
setting
does
not
depend
on
the
child
narrator’s
truthfulness
or
on
his
accurate
childlike
nature,
but
rather
on
the
individual’s
approach
to
reading.
When
a
reader
manages
to
fully
immerse
in
a
novel’s
setting
and
to
put
himself
in
the
characters’
shoes,
then
the
reader
will
be
able
to
get
emotionally
and
intellectually
involved,
even
if
plot,
characters,
and
setting
display
a
number
of
logistic
or
stylistic
shortcomings.
Additionally,
the
author
puts
his
child
character
in
an
inferior
position
in
relation
to
the
other
characters
in
the
novel,
because
the
child
does
not
understand
the
world
of
the
grown-‐ups
and
always
lags
behind
in
understanding
the
development
of
the
story’s
events.
In
When
We
Were
Romans,
Lawrence
trusts
his
mother
unconditionally,
although
the
reader
is
aware
of
the
mother’s
growing
madness
and
loss
of
reality
that
develops
throughout
the
novel.
The
mother
says:
”I’m
sure
they
won’t
mind
if
you
take
a
bit
of
time
off,
after
all
you’ll
be
learning
about
Rome.
For
that
matter
you
could
even
go
to
school
here.”
That
made
me
laugh,
I
said
“but
how
can
I
mum,
don’t
be
silly,
I
don’t
speak
italian
(sic)”
but
mum
said
“you
can
learn
some,
I
can
teach
you.”
I
wasn’t
sure,
I
thought
“I
bet
it
will
be
hard,
it
will
take
ages”
but
then
I
thought
“if
mum
says
they
won’t
mind
about
the
tests
she
must
know.”
(MK
61)
On
the
one
hand,
the
mother
is
right
when
she
says
that
finding
a
new
school
is
a
simple
affair.
Yet,
this
discussion
between
the
two
characters
highlights
the
child’s
dependence
on
his
mother.
Throughout
the
novel,
there
are
a
multitude
of
situations
when
Lawrence
has
to
take
adult
control,
because
the
mother
is
too
depressed
to
think
or
act
reasonably.
Yet,
the
child
craves
the
mother’s
support,
approval
and
reassurance
in
everyday
situations.
The
child’s
potential
to
function
like
an
adult
in
precarious
situations
and
to
act
like
a
common
child
at
other
times,
highlights
the
idea
that
adult
and
childlike
behaviour
develop
according
to
86
87
experienced,
they
are
likely
to
make
beneficial
choices,
whereas
young
people
are
likely
to
make
costly
ones’
(TS
718).
On
the
one
hand,
Schapiro
Tamar
is
of
course
right,
because
the
distinct
role
allocation,
distinguishing
between
provider
and
receiver,
the
cared
for
and
the
caretaker,
allows
society
to
function
smoothly.
People’s
roles
are
organized
according
to
their
general
physical,
mental
and
social
capacities.
Adults
have
more
life
experience
that
allows
them
to
take
informed
decisions
and
to
make
the
right
choices.
However,
what
do
we
as
adults
label
as
‘informed’
or
‘right
choices’?
In
Matthew
Kneale’s
novel,
Lawrence
observes:
I
thought
“I
bet
she’s
going
to
say
something
serious”
and
I
was
right,
she
said
“what
would
you
say,
lesonfon
(sic),
if
we
stay
on
for
a
bit
here?
Perhaps
until
the
summer?”
Jemima
laughed,
she
said
“yes
yes,
lets
stay”
but
I
don’t
think
she
understood
really,
she
just
thought
“if
we
stay
then
I
can
have
more
ice
cream.”
(MK
60)
Of
course,
Lawrence
is
right
when
he
observes
that
the
mother
tries
to
trick
the
children
into
complying
with
her
plan
of
staying
in
Italy
for
a
longer
period.
Lawrence
is
the
link
between
the
adult
world
and
the
little
sister’s
point
of
view,
who
manages
to
remain
childlike,
while
at
the
same
time
beginning
to
read
between
the
lines.
Lawrence
starts
to
consciously
understand
that
adults
use
deliberate
language,
both
verbal
and
physical,
in
order
to
manipulate
other
people.
Of
course,
one
could
argue
that
the
mother
manipulates
her
children,
by
coaxing
them
in
a
friendly
way
and
that
the
children
are
thus,
put
into
an
inferior
situation.
On
the
other
hand,
Jemima
is
content
with
the
situation,
because
she
can
sense
her
own
benefit
in
the
events
that
are
going
to
take
place.
So
in
a
way,
adults
are
made
to
believe
that
they
pull
the
strings
and
that
they
manage
to
coax
their
children
into
compliance.
Yet,
seen
from
another
perspective,
children
are
more
creative
than
adults,
because
they
manage
to
extract
the
best
or
most
beneficial
for
their
own
wellbeing.
A
child
narrator
manages
to
convey
this
duality
in
understanding
and
in
looking
at
one
and
the
same
idea
from
different
perspectives,
because
the
child
narrator
is
directly
speaking
from
his
frame
of
mind
and
reveals
an
attitude
that
remains
undisclosed
to
the
adults
in
the
novel.
Consequently,
the
child
narrator
makes
the
adult
reader
the
accomplice
of
his
world
and
explains
to
the
adult
reader
how
much
understanding
a
child
has
of
the
adult
point
of
view.
Thus,
reader
and
child
narrator
form
an
informed
entity
that
stands
in
contrast
to
the
88
other
characters
in
the
novel,
who
do
not
know
what
the
narrator
is
thinking
or
saying
about
them
or
about
himself.
Furthermore,
as
already
mentioned
several
times
before,
I
am
convinced
that
children
are
often
intuitively
right.
Adults
have
more
experience,
which
can
help
them
to
make
the
right
choices,
but
adults
also
carry
a
bag
of
negative
experiences
that
push
them
to
avoid
taking
certain
risks
that
could
allow
them
to
expand
and
to
multiply
their
benefit.
Children
have
fewer
experiences
to
compare
to
and
to
shy
away
from.
So
as
a
consequence,
a
lot
of
experiences
can
make
a
person
wiser,
but
also
more
prudent,
in
either
a
protective
or
a
stifling
way.
In
When
We
Were
Romans,
the
mother
takes
all
the
major
decisions,
like
leaving
the
father
and
fleeing
to
Rome.
Yet,
when
the
family
arrives
in
Italy,
Lawrence
has
to
hold
it
together,
because
the
mother
suffers
from
paranoia
and
depression.
In
Extremely
Loud
&
Incredibly
Close,
Oskar
says:
‘She
was
obviously
mad
at
me,
but
I
didn’t
know
why.
I
hadn’t
done
anything
wrong.
Or
if
I
had,
I
didn’t
know
what
it
was.
And
I
definitely
didn’t
mean
to
do
it.’39
On
the
one
hand,
we
have
argued
that
children
adopt
an
inferior
position
to
adults,
because
they
lack
the
right
level
of
understanding,
in
order
to
debunk
ambidextrous
behaviour.
Yet,
this
paragraph
illustrates
that
the
child
character
has
the
advantage
that
he
ignores
adult
dismissal.
Children
are
very
adamant
and
insistent,
when
they
want
to
know
or
understand
something.
Of
course,
this
statement
is
a
generalization
and
the
way
an
adult
behaves
depends
on
his
cultural
background
and
education,
but
generally,
an
adult
who
is
rejected
by
another
adult,
usually
renounces
on
asking
further
questions
and
accepts
the
answer
that
he
has
been
given.
Children
though
keep
asking,
until
they
get
the
answers
they
were
looking
for,
or
until
they
get
at
least
an
answer
at
all.
In
that
respect,
it
is
advantageous
for
an
author
to
have
a
child
narrator,
if
he
wants
to
introduce
a
gradual
amount
of
suspense
to
his
novel,
because
at
first,
the
child’s
attempts
to
voice
any
criticism
and
to
change
the
events
of
the
story
might
go
unheard,
but
later
on,
as
the
novel
develops,
the
child’s
voice
becomes
more
poignant,
until
the
child
or
narrator
reaches
his
goal.
Whether
getting
an
answer
at
any
cost
is
always
desirable
is
debatable,
but
at
least
the
39
Safran
Foer,
Jonathan.
Extremely
Loud
&
Incredibly
Close.
London:
Penguin
Books.
2006,
6
–
90
world
view
and
way
of
thinking.
However,
in
terms
of
disadvantages,
we
need
to
wonder,
on
the
other
hand,
to
what
extent
it
is
appropriate
to
treat
any
topic
from
a
childlike
and
fun
perspective?
At
the
centre
of
Jonathan
Safran
Foer’s
novel
Extremely
Loud
&
Incredibly
Close,
there
is
Oskar
a
ten-‐year-‐old
child
narrator.
During
the
story,
Oskar
unravels
his
family’s
history.
The
narrator’s
father
died
in
9/11
and
Oskar
goes
on
a
quest
to
find
the
lock
that
fits
a
key
that
his
father
had
hidden
at
home
in
a
vase.
Death
and
terrorism
are
two
topics
that
people
find
it
generally
hard
to
deal
with.
Jonathan
Safran
Foer
approaches
stupefying
topics
from
a
child’s
perspective
and
throughout
the
reading
process
it
becomes
clear
that
on
the
one
hand,
the
child
manages
to
lighten
the
novel’s
tone
and
to
make
the
reader
smile,
despite
reading
about
a
desolate
topic,
because
his
ideas
are
innovative
and
his
outlook
on
the
world
is
positive.
On
the
other
hand,
the
reader
cannot
fully
enjoy
the
positive
atmosphere
and
the
suspension
created
by
the
narrator’s
light-‐hearted
quest
for
the
lock,
because
the
reader
is
aware
of
the
child’s
distressing
familial
situation.
The
reader
should
share
in
the
child’s
adventurous
quest,
but
we
as
grown-‐ups
know
that
the
child
narrator
goes
on
a
quest
to
forget
about
his
father’s
death
instead
of
dealing
with
the
sad
situation
at
hand.
Laura
Miller
argues
that
choosing
a
child
narrator
gives
Foer
access
to
extravagant
emotions
and
quirky
imaginings
that
would
seem
cloying
or
self-‐indulgent
in
a
grown-‐up,
but
at
the
cost
of
allowing
the
central
trauma
its
due.
September
11
was
a
surreal
intrusion
of
the
spectacular
and
malevolent
into
the
banal
and
safe.
But
for
a
kid
like
Oskar,
reality
has
yet
to
be
fully
established,
so
surreality
is
impossible.
How
and
why
his
father
was
lost
matters
little
next
to
the
raw
fact
of
his
disappearance.40
Laura
Miller
is
of
course
right,
when
she
points
out
that
Oscar’s
search
does
not
discuss
the
profound
political
situation
that
has
led
to
his
father’s
death.
Yet,
we
need
to
question
to
what
extent
the
political
destiny
is
relevant
for
the
story’s
message.
By
discussing
Oskar’s
reality
and
by
depicting
his
way
of
dealing
with
his
father’s
death
and
his
denial
of
his
reality,
the
narrative
also
highlights
the
broader
political
and
social
picture
for
the
reader.
The
adult
reader
is
aware
of
the
background
story
and
can
make
sense
of
the
fact
that
the
author
hints
at
the
effect
40
Miller,
Laura.
“Terror
Comes
to
Tiny
Town.”
Nymag.com:
of
political
decisions
in
general.
The
text
becomes
a
subtle
tool
to
highlight
social
and
political
shortcomings.
The
story’s
content
and
the
parts
that
the
author
does
not
explicitly
mention
underline
reality
even
more.
Of
course,
the
reader’s
reaction
to
the
comic
aspects
of
the
novel
depends
on
the
reader’s
individual
character
and
on
his
personal
attitude
towards
topics
like
death
or
terrorism.
If
the
reader’s
way
of
coming
to
terms
with
those
situations
in
life
is
also
by
resorting
to
humour
and
by
concentrating
on
the
fun
aspect
of
life,
then
the
reader
will
be
able
to
benefit
from
the
funny
side
that
the
child
narrator
creates.
Yet,
even
if
the
reader
manages
to
enjoy
the
child
character’s
positive
attitude
towards
life,
he
still
remains
aware
of
the
child’s
precarious
situation,
which
leads
to
a
negative
connotation
that
pervades
the
whole
story.
If
the
narrator
were
an
adult,
then
the
fun
aspect
would
sound
more
mature,
because
it
would
show
through
sarcasm
or
irony
and
the
reader
would
be
more
confident
to
believe
that
the
narrator’s
comic
way
of
dealing
with
the
situation
is
his
nature
and
that
it
is
more
a
coming
to
terms
with
the
terrible
situation,
than
an
attempt
to
block
out
reality.
In
The
Life
Before
Us,
Momo
says
that
‘it’s
always
in
the
eyes
that
people
are
the
saddest’
(RG
24).
If
the
author
uses
child
narrators
there
is
the
problem
that
the
novel
is
perceived
as
playing
with
the
heart’s
strings.
There
is
always
the
danger
that
a
serious
novel
becomes
a
tearjerker,
without
it
intending
to
be
one,
because
the
child’s
voice
renders
the
text
melodramatic
and
as
a
consequence,
the
novel’s
message
falls
to
pieces.
In
the
end,
there
are
a
number
of
aspects
that
speak
in
favour
and
against
putting
a
child
narrator
at
a
novel’s
centre,
but
it
always
depends
on
the
reader’s
ability
for
interpretation
and
on
his
background,
to
which
extent
the
child
narrator
is
perceived
as
authentic
and
to
which
extent
the
child
narrator
can
develop
his
full
potential
effect,
in
favour
of
the
successful
and
most
affecting
transmission
of
the
story’s
central
message.
In
the
following
chapter,
we
are
going
to
analyze
to
which
extent
Romain
Gary
and
Jonathan
Safran
Foer
manage
to
employ
the
child
narrator’s
assets
best,
in
order
to
support
the
successful
and
appealing
transmission
of
their
novel’s
message.
Additionally,
I
am
also
going
to
discuss
which
challenges
the
authors
had
to
face
as
a
consequence
of
choosing
a
child
as
the
voice
of
their
narratives.
92
60-‐71,
61
–
Further
references
are
included
in
the
text
(JMK).
93
discuss
the
ordinary
and
common
from
a
child’s
perspective.
Yet,
one
cannot
expect
that
all
the
novels
written
from
a
child’s
perspective
intend
to
examine
the
ordinary
from
an
unusual
point
of
view.
Certainly,
there
are
also
authors
who
especially
concentrate
their
writing
attention
on
everyday
topics,
because
readers
also
find
it
comforting
to
compare
their
own
daily
existence
with
other
people’s
experiences
and
attitudes.
Yet,
whether
an
author
focuses
on
extraordinary
events
and
people
or
whether
a
text
is
based
on
ordinary
lives,
a
writer
will
never
manage
to
completely
separate
the
one
world
from
the
other:
there
will
always
be
extraordinary
in
the
ordinary
and
vice-‐
versa,
because
both
worlds
are
intrinsically
linked.
Additionally,
it
also
depends
on
each
individual,
what
a
person
views
as
ordinary
or
as
unusual.
Consequently,
the
interpretation
of
the
text
depends
ultimately
on
the
reader
and
on
his
worldview.
Furthermore,
the
criticism
that
child
narrators
react
in
an
extraordinary
way
to
an
extreme
situation
can
be
challenged
too,
because
how
do
we
expect
people
to
react
to
extreme
situations?
How
do
we
expect
children
to
react
to
their
parents’
death
or
to
the
confrontation
with
drugs
and
prostitution?
Allowedly,
one
could
argue
that
an
author
would
rather
choose
a
child
narrator
or
character
to
feature
in
a
novel
with
an
extreme
setting,
because
it
is
more
interesting
for
the
reader
to
see
how
a
child
reacts
to
a
crisis
and
develops
later
on,
because
children
react
differently
than
adults.
Yet,
this
is
also
a
generalization,
because
no
one
can
ever
accurately
predict
how
someone
else
is
going
to
respond
or
behave,
since
it
depends
on
a
person’s
prior
experiences
and
on
his
current
mood,
how
he
judges
and
evaluates
a
situation.
What
remains
interesting
though
is
that
children
have
to
deal
with
an
extreme
situation
and
they
have
less
experience
to
fall
back
onto,
which
could
assure
them
that
there
is
always
a
way
out.
Yet,
because
children
have
less
experience
in
life,
they
also
avoid
viewing
or
perceiving
the
new
negative
or
extreme
incident
as
another
one
in
a
series
of
negative
experiences.
The
adult
can
perceive
a
negative
encounter
as
too
overwhelming,
because
there
have
been
many
previous
negative
events,
whereas
a
child
perceives
the
experience
as
a
first
and
still
is
free
to
deal
with
it
based
on
an
optimistic
and
unconditioned
mindset.
Furthermore,
Jane
McKee
argues
that
the
novels
featuring
child
narrators
94
are
constructed
in
such
a
way
that
they
give
pride
of
place
to
the
elucidation
of
the
motives,
which
govern
the
actions
of
the
characters.
Many
of
them
also
reveal
an
amazingly
symmetrical
construction
of
plot
in
that
the
attitudes
and
preoccupations
of
the
central
character
or
characters
are
reflected
to
a
very
remarkable
extent
in
the
minor
characters
of
the
novel.
Each
work
tends
to
reflect
a
certain
type
of
attitude
to
the
problems
posed
to
man
by
the
human
situation,
evoked
in
greatest
detail
in
the
central
character,
but
reflected,
from
a
slightly
different
angle,
in
many
of
the
characters
around
him
and
in
a
way
which
goes
beyond
the
normal
convergence
of
interests
to
be
expected
in
a
shared
situation.
(JMK
62)
First
of
all,
the
fact
that
the
same
motive
is
recurrently
exposed
by
different
characters
and
through
different
events
in
the
story
is,
on
the
one
hand,
only
natural,
since
the
recurring
idea
is
the
one
key
issue
that
the
author
wants
to
discuss
in
his
text
and
to
give
his
readers
an
understanding
of.
Additionally,
the
idea
that
one
motive
is
consistently
discussed
and
adduced
in
a
text
mirrors
real
life
thinking,
because
people
also
focus
on
the
same
issue
over
and
over
again,
if
that
idea
is
what
occupies
their
current
world
view.
In
addition,
if
we
look
at
Jane
McKee’s
point
in
relation
to
child
narrators
and
if
we
assume
that
children
have
limited
access
to
background
experience,
then
the
fact
that
the
same
motive
recurs
throughout
a
novel
is
also
lifelike,
because
there
are
only
few
key
motives
or
strong
points
of
interest
in
the
focus
of
the
child’s
worldview.
Moreover,
Jane
McKee
also
argues
that
novels
narrated
by
children
tend
to
constantly
concentrate
on
the
same
motive
and
to
reflect
this
motive
through
the
text’s
minor
characters
and
their
actions
or
attitudes,
too.
In
my
opinion,
this
repetitive
approach
to
a
specific
topic
reflects
true
to
life
movement,
because
we
observe
in
other
people
the
character
traits
or
concerns
that
currently
occupy
our
frame
of
mind
and
we
tend
to
form
relations
or
get
in
contact
with
those
people,
who
are
similar
to
us
in
character
and
attitude.
Of
course,
on
the
other
hand,
it
can
also
be
the
case
that
people
surround
themselves
with
or
observe
ideas
that
represent
the
complete
opposite
of
their
own
worldview.
In
that
case,
we
could
say
that
the
same
motives
are
still
recurring,
just
reflected
from
the
opposite
perspective.
Additionally,
we
can
also
argue
that
adults
influence
children
and
shape
their
way
of
thinking
and
acting.
Now,
if
we
assume
that
the
child
narrator
is
the
main
character
of
a
novel
and
that
the
adults
are
the
minor
characters,
then
the
minor
characters
will
of
course
share
the
same
95
central
thinking
as
the
narrator,
because
the
child
reflects
the
behaviour
and
frame
of
mind
of
the
adults
surrounding
him.
And
then
again,
we
need
to
ask
ourselves
the
question
of
how
many
different
motives
there
actually
are
in
terms
of
novel
writing
material.
Hence,
the
idea
that
the
writer
recurrently
highlights
the
same
motive
throughout
a
novel
is
also
due
to
a
limited
amount
of
topics
to
draw
from.
If
an
author
would
include
many
different
motives,
then
the
author
would
need
to
expand
those
motives,
to
weave
a
text
around
each
theme
and
to
interlink
the
different
topics.
This
cross-‐
linking
would
lead
to
the
development
of
an
epic
story,
which
would
be
challenging
for
the
reader
to
digest.
Additionally,
if
we
think
in
terms
of
the
child
narrator,
then
we
also
need
to
bear
in
mind
that
it
is
easier
for
a
child
character
to
display
one
motive
or
topic
more
in
depth,
than
to
relate
to
different
motives
more
in
detail,
because
it
is
more
plausible
that
a
child
has
only
made
one
or
two
influential
experiences
in
his
life,
than
a
multitude
of
experiences,
which
are
worthy
of
discussion.
Of
course,
each
novel
or
narrator
touches
upon
various
issues
throughout
the
novel’s
course,
but
in
the
end
those
ideas
all
come
together
to
highlight
the
narrator’s
or
the
child
narrator’s
major
concern
or
focus
in
life.
Certainly,
if
we
say
that
it
is
easier
for
a
child
character
to
focus
on
one
topic
and
to
illustrate
that
idea
more
in
detail,
we
could
object
that
the
author
is
the
source
of
the
text
and
that
surely
an
adult
can
manage
to
interlink
and
discuss
several
topics
within
one
text.
Yet,
then
again
it
is
the
author’s
interest
to
expand
the
reader’s
understanding
of
one
key
idea
and
so,
it
makes
more
sense
to
highlight
that
single
key
motive
recurrently
throughout
the
novel
than
to
introduce
a
multitude
of
ideas.
The
previous
discussion
has
made
it
clear
that
the
qualities
that
we
as
critics
identify
as
specifically
belonging
to
novels
featuring
child
narrators
are
in
fact
partly
universal
observations
and
expand
to
all
literary
genres
and
styles.
In
the
following
chapters,
we
are
going
to
have
a
closer
look
at
The
Life
Before
Us,
by
Romain
Gary
and
at
Extremely
Loud
and
Incredibly
Close,
by
Jonathan
Safran
Foer.
To
what
extent
do
these
novels
mirror
the
ideas
previously
raised
and
to
what
extent
do
these
two
novels
differ
from
texts
featuring
adult
narrators?
Which
96
advantages
do
these
two
authors
see
in
employing
a
child,
as
the
narrator
of
their
story,
or
which
disadvantages
does
their
technique
yield?
97
98
99
Moreover,
Momo
addresses
the
reader
directly
and
admits
that
he
is
still
inexperienced
and
young
and
that
his
judgment
needs
the
reader’s
relativization,
at
times:
‘now
I
understood.
I
hadn’t
lived
enough
yet
to
have
enough
experience,
and
even
now
talking
to
you
I
know
that
even
after
years
of
taking
it
on
the
chin
there’s
always
something
left
to
learn’
(RG
173).
Momo
puts
himself
in
an
inferior
position,
in
relation
to
the
reader,
by
admitting
that
he
still
has
a
lot
to
learn.
On
the
one
hand,
the
child’s
offensive
attitude
makes
him
sympathetic
to
the
reader,
because
the
reader
feels
as
if
he
understands
Momo’s
helplessness.
Additionally,
the
reader
also
feels
the
wish
to
follow
Momo’s
story
and
to
observe,
if
he
manages
to
grow,
as
time
goes
by,
and
if
he
develops
through
experience.
Moreover,
Momo
plays
with
the
idea
that
he
has
had
a
challenging
childhood.
He
points
out
that
he
had
to
‘take
a
lot
on
the
chin.’
In
relation
to
this
statement,
the
reader
feels
more
moved,
when
a
child
narrator
expresses
this
reality,
than
when
an
adult
has
had
to
endure
a
lot
of
suffering.
Every
individual
has
had
his
share
of
personal
tragedy
and
misfortune
and
consequently,
the
adult
reader
expects
the
characters
in
a
novel
to
equally
deal
with
their
fate
in
a
dignified
way,
without
excessive
lamentation.
In
contrast,
the
reader
can
also
find
it
interesting
to
witness
the
fate
of
an
individual
who
cannot
deal
with
his
personal
misfortune
at
all
and
where
a
text
lays
out
and
tracks
the
person’s
gradual
decline.
In
conclusion,
a
reader
is
much
more
inclined
to
feel
for
and
emotionally
support
a
child
narrator,
who
has
to
come
to
terms
with
a
lot
of
suffering,
than
with
an
adult
narrator,
who
finds
himself
in
a
similarly
distressing
situation.
Of
course,
this
explanation
is
also
based
on
a
generalization.
Thus,
the
fact
that
Momo
uses
a
direct
address
to
speak
to
the
reader
bypasses
the
possibility
that
an
author
might
not
be
naturally
inclined
to
sympathize
with
a
child
narrator.
Momo
involves
the
reader
directly
by
talking
to
him
and
thus,
assures
that
he
is
being
heard.
Furthermore,
Momo
is
a
nine-‐year-‐old
boy,
who
grows
up
in
an
orphanage
and
day
care
centre,
which
is
run
by
an
ex-‐prostitute,
called
Madame
Rosa:
Madame
Rosa
was
an
ex-‐whore
who’d
come
back
from
being
deported
to
the
Jewish
homes
in
Germany
and
had
opened
a
clandestine
rest
home
for
the
children
of
whores
who
could
be
blackmailed
with
loss
of
paternity
rights
for
illicit
prostitution
and
have
to
hide
their
kids
because
neighbors
are
usually
bastards
capable
of
reporting
you
to
the
Public
Welfare.
(RG
143)
100
As
a
child
narrator,
Momo
has
the
advantage
that
he
can
comment
on
Madame
Rosa
and
the
children’s
situation,
without
feeling
the
need
to
interfere
and
to
meddle
with
the
circumstances.
Adults
commonly
feel
like
they
need
to
get
involved,
when
people
seem
to
have
trouble
leading
a,
so-‐called,
regulated
life.
People
also
tend
to
condemn
each
other’s
passivity,
when
a
situation
calls
for
adult
intervention.
Momo
though
does
not
feel
the
social
pressure
that
usually
dictates,
what
is
morally
and
ethically
acceptable,
in
a
certain
culture,
or
not.
Consequently,
Momo
manages
to
observe
a
situation
devoid
of
any
biased
judgment.
Additionally,
Momo
is
a
child,
who
lives
in
a
situation
that
middle-‐class
society
normally
deems
inappropriate
for
a
child.
Hence,
speaking
from
his
point
of
view,
Momo
can
convince
the
reader
that
the
desire
to
alter
another
person’s
situation
can
be
well-‐intentioned,
but
that
people,
who
we
deem
in
need
of
help
or
change
do
not
necessarily
appreciate
or
need
external
support,
because
they
feel
protected
and
secure
in
their
current
situation,
as
it
is.
Momo
belongs
to
that
social
group
of
people,
who
are
dominated
by
individuals,
who
feel
morally
superior,
because
they
have
enjoyed
an
education
and
because
they
feel
that
they
can
take
informed
decisions.
Yet,
within
that
context,
Momo
points
out
the
emotional
shortcomings
and
the
uprooting
that
for
children
can
be
the
end
result
of
overtly
zealous
social
welfare:
‘minors
are
wonderfully
protected
in
France,
and
when
there’s
nobody
to
look
after
them
the
government
throws
them
in
jail
for
safekeeping’
(RG
106).
Of
course,
on
the
one
hand,
Momo’s
statement
is
exaggerated
and
additionally,
the
government
needs
to
solve
social
problems,
by
putting
socially
deprived
children
in
safekeeping,
when
there
are
no
foster
families
available.
Yet,
a
child
narrator
manages
to
illustrate
that
grown-‐ups
view
children’s
problems
from
an
adult
perspective
and
that
there
is
also
the
child’s
own
opinion
of
what
is
best
for
him
that
adults
should
consider,
when
looking
for
a
solution
to
the
problem.
Furthermore,
Romain
Gary
gives
his
child
narrator
a
dimension
of
maturity,
by
putting
him
in
a
situation,
where
children
are
not
pampered
and
carefully
looked
after.
Momo
is
the
child
of
a
prostitute
and
grows
up
under
the
care
of
Madame
Rosa,
an
ex-‐prostitute,
who
dedicates
her
final
years
to
looking
after
socially
disadvantaged
children,
like
Momo.
Within
that
context,
Momo
picks
up
101
102
he
manages
to
make
sense
of
the
words
he
hears,
then
this
discussion
is
basically
purely
hypothetical,
because
Momo
is
a
fictional
character.
The
actual
level
of
understanding
lies
between
author
and
reader.
Yet,
the
discussion
about
the
child’s
level
of
comprehension
is
relevant,
because
it
illustrates
to
what
extent
an
author
tries
to
portray
a
realistic,
common
child
as
the
narrator
of
his
story.
Moreover,
we
have
argued
that
the
author
allows
his
child
narrator
to
repeat
the
words
of
his
surroundings,
in
order
to
express
the
idea
that
the
child
lacks
accurate
linguistic
knowledge
and
the
ability
to
formulate
his
ideas
independently
of
others.
Of
course,
adults
also
repeat
other
people’s
words
at
times,
because
other
people
know
better,
how
to
express
themselves
or
because
we
admire,
what
we
have
heard
other
people
say.
Moreover,
there
is
also
the
idea
that
not
just
children
lack
the
ability
to
formulate
their
ideas
accurately,
but
that
also
adults
can
display
linguistic
shortcomings,
because
they
have
never
learned
how
to
articulate
their
emotions
and
opinion:
‘while
he
was
talking,
Monsieur
N’Da
Amédée
used
to
gesticulate
and
work
himself
into
a
lather,
not
because
he
was
angry,
but
because
he
had
many
more
things
to
say
to
his
parents
than
he
could
express
with
his
low-‐class
resources’
(RG
27).
Monsieur
N’Da
Amédée’s
shortcoming
links
him
to
a
child’s
reality
and
thus,
illustrates
the
idea
that
children,
like
lower
social
classes,
are
not
taught
or
meant
to,
by
upper
or
middle-‐
class
society,
how
to
communicate
their
desires
and
how
to
become
noticeable
through
language,
because
if
all
the
members
of
society
had
an
individual
say,
then
that
situation
would
turn
established
social
organization
upside-‐down.
In
any
way,
repeating
other
people’s
phrases
is
a
way
of
trying
to
belong
to
a
social
group.
The
fact
that
children
and
lower
social
classes
use
different
language,
than
higher
social
classes,
illustrates
the
discrepancy
in
status
on
different
levels.
Momo’s
language
identifies
him
as
a
member
of
Paris’
socially
deprived
milieu.
This
fact
puts
him
in
an
inferior
position
in
relation
to
the
upper-‐
class
society.
However,
the
people
surrounding
Momo
share
the
same
language
features
as
the
child,
which
allows
the
group
to
identify
Momo
as
one
of
them.
In
Momo’s
case,
the
child
is
trying
to
form
a
social
identity
in
relation
to
Madame
Rosa,
because
he
is
an
orphan
or
at
least,
he
does
not
know
the
whereabouts
of
his
parents.
So
Momo
repeats
Madame
Rosa’s
words,
in
order
to
learn,
how
to
behave
within
his
foster
mother’s
social
environment
or
context.
It
might
also
be
that
103
Momo
was
too
young,
when
he
was
separated
from
his
mother,
in
order
to
remember
anything
about
the
ideas
he
learned
in
her
social
context.
So
Momo
tries
to
form
an
identity
in
relation
to
his
current
setting.
Moreover,
if
we
pick
up
on
the
idea
that
mirroring
other
people
helps
us
to
form
an
identity,
then
we
can
also
say
that
people,
who
have
to
switch
between
social
contexts,
because
of
changes,
in
terms
of
work
place
or
relationships,
also
imitate
other
people’s
speech
or
actions,
in
order
to
feel
more
at
home
or
in
order
to
synchronize
their
identity
with
their
new
and
unknown
environment.
Additionally,
it
is
a
fact
that
people
copy
other
people’s
behaviour,
if
they
like
what
they
see
or
hear.
Momo
likes
Madame
Rosa
of
course,
because
she
is
his
guardian
and
consequently,
he
mirrors
her
mimics.
Vice
versa,
Momo
also
wants
Madame
Rosa
to
accept
him.
Instinctively,
he
tries
to
behave
like
her
and
to
show
her
that
he
is
one
of
her
kind:
‘it
gave
me
a
bad
shock
to
hear
I
was
paid
for.
I
thought
Madame
Rosa
loved
me
free
gratis
and
there
was
some
connection
between
us.
I
cried
about
it
all
one
night,
and
that
was
my
first
big
sorrow’
(RG
2).
Momo’s
words
illustrate
the
discrepancy
between
the
infantile
and
adult
perception
of
the
world.
In
the
adult
world,
material
laws
reign,
whereas
in
a
child’s
world,
mutual
sympathy
and
understanding
are
what
keeps
people
together.
Now,
why
would
an
author
choose
a
child
as
the
narrator
and
not
an
adult,
in
order
to
illustrate
that
people
imitate
the
people
surrounding
them,
in
order
to
construct
a
feeling
of
sympathy
and
membership?
We
have
already
established
that
adults
also
mirror
other
adults,
so
an
adult
narrator
could
illustrate
the
same
idea.
Yet,
it
is
more
clearly
apparent
that
a
child
mirrors
his
surroundings,
when
he
adopts
adult
expressions,
than
an
adult,
who
repeats
other
adult
talk.
Furthermore,
earlier
on,
we
have
pointed
out
that
first
person
narratives
are
stories
of
‘self-‐interest’.
Although
Momo
talks
about
his
own
experiences,
and
although
the
reader
lives
Momo’s
life,
by
listening
to
his
first-‐hand
account,
we
simultaneously
also
experience
other
characters’
lives
and
tragedies.
Thus,
a
first-‐
person
narrator
manages
to
extent
the
story’s
scope
to
other
characters’
experiences
and
tragedies.
Jane
McKee
points
out
that
Romain
‘Gary’s
novels
always
involve
a
degree
of
psychological
analysis,
and
psychological
realism’
(JMK
60).
I
would
say
that
Romain
Gary’s
text
conveys
psychological
realism,
but
I
would
104
add
that
the
author
also
manages
to
capture
realistic
human
interaction
and
setting,
because
the
narrator’s
and
the
other
characters’
lives
overlap
and
interfere
with
each
other.
Momo,
the
child
narrator,
is
the
miniature
version
of
the
older
people
surrounding
him.
Momo’s
life
develops
along
the
same
lines
as
the
other
characters’
lives.
The
reader
is
aware
of
this
parallel
in
lifestyle
and
experience,
but
the
fact
that
Momo
is
still
a
child
makes
the
reader
want
to
hope
that
Momo
manages
to
escape
his
current
setting
and
to
live
a
life
devoid
of
prostitution
and
drug
abuse,
despite
the
similarities
between
him
and
the
adult
characters
in
his
novel.
Consequently,
a
child
narrator
serves
the
purpose
of
highlighting,
what
a
person
can
think
and
feel
at
the
beginning
of
his
life
and
to
which
extent
one’s
surroundings
still
predominate
one’s
own
nature,
when
it
comes
to
the
question,
how
a
life
develops
in
the
long
run.
Moreover,
in
terms
of
realistic
setting,
Romain
Gary’s
novel
takes
place
in
Paris,
but
the
narrative
refrains
from
sugarcoating
the
city
as
a
centre
of
fashion
and
cosmopolites.
The
author
manages
to
show
Paris
realistically,
as
the
metropolis
that
it
is,
with
all
its
duality
and
the
wear
and
tear
of
domestic
quarrels
and
street
fights,
which
are
fought
on
a
daily
basis.
The
child
narrator,
Momo,
describes
old
and
young,
native
and
immigrant,
health
and
disease,
as
if
they
were
not
opposites,
but
ordinary
parts
of
daily
life.
21st
century
society
claims
to
be
enlightened
and
to
regard
life’s
experiences
mentioned
above,
as
natural
aspects
of
life,
which
they
are
in
fact,
and
the
media
pretends
that
we
find
a
voice
to
discuss
those
topics
openly,
but
ideas
like
racism,
immigration,
and
death
still
remain
taboos.
At
the
beginning
of
this
thesis,
we
have
argued
that
putting
a
child
at
the
centre
of
a
novel
and
allowing
him
to
take
over
the
narrative
grants
a
voice
to
the
weakest
members
of
society.
Romain
Gary
attributes
this
voice
to
Momo
and
additionally,
the
author
allows
his
child
narrator
to
discern
the
precarious
situation
of
people
that
are
also
deprived
of
a
voice
of
their
own.
Romain
Gary
draws
attention
to
two
minor
ethnic
groups
in
France:
Momo
is
an
Arab
boy
and
the
child
of
a
prostitute.
The
author
puts
his
main
character
in
a
situation,
where
he
can
voice
criticism,
without
sounding
condescending,
because
the
narrator
himself
belongs
to
the
two
socially
challenged
groups.
In
addition,
Momo
is
a
child
and
thus,
he
does
not
occupy
a
social
position
that
allows
him
to
sound
condescending
anyway.
In
that
respect,
we
can
turn
to
Tanner
Tony,
who
when
he
105
facilitates
the
illustration
of
the
link
between
the
external
events
and
the
internal,
mental
or
psychological
growth
of
the
child.
Of
course,
the
author
could
also
employ
an
omniscient
adult
narrator,
who
outlines
the
child’s
physical
and
psychological
development
in
relation
to
his
social
context.
However,
the
reader
feels
more
involved,
when
a
character
directly
relates
his
own
situation,
than
when
there
is
another
narrator,
who
is
just
describing
and
commenting
from
the
outside.
The
vantage
point
in
these
two
situations
is
slightly
different
and
it
depends
on
the
author,
which
effect
he
wants
to
create
with
his
narrator.
Moreover,
Borsch
Jean
points
out
that
‘the
author’s
system
of
broken-‐up
composition,
of
very
short
chapters
each
of
which
relates
a
single
episode,
allows
him
to
introduce
small
detached
pieces
under
the
guise
of
short
stories.’42
These
short
stories
all
relate
different
stories
of
love,
hope,
prostitution
and
otherness,
while
at
the
same
time,
sharing
the
common
message
of
how
different
lives
are,
yet,
how
commonly
they
are
lived,
with
the
same
need
to
belong
to
someone,
somewhere.
In
addition,
Momo’s
life
itself
is
a
short
version
of
a
human
life,
because
it
represents
childhood,
which
is
a
small
part
of
a
complete,
average
human
life.
Short
stories
have
an
internal
logic
of
their
own
and
a
child
has
also
a
personally
coherent
philosophy,
by
which
he
lives.
Furthermore,
short
stories
usually
end
in
a
final
conclusion,
which
is
comparable
to
the
different
stages
of
a
human
life,
which
would
be
in
Momo’s
case
his
childhood.
Yet
one
could
argue
that
a
life
moves
from
one
phase
to
another:
from
childhood,
to
adulthood,
to
old
age.
Yet,
one
short
story
can
also
be
the
basis
for
another.
Consequently,
Romain
Gary’s
way
of
composing
his
novel,
based
on
a
series
of
‘short
stories,’
mirrors
the
various
stages
a
person
runs
through,
from
his
birth
to
his
death.
Within
his
childhood
phase,
Momo’s
life
is
also
a
composition
of
broken
up
fragments
that
have
been
reconstructed
to
form
a
whole
new
identity.
Momo’s
early
childhood
is
a
blur
of
fragments,
while
his
encounters
with
foreigners
are
also
fragments
that
allow
him
to
reconsider
his
own
position
in
society,
as
an
immigrant
child
and
orphan,
while
the
loss
of
Madame
Rosa
later
on,
fragments
the
child’s
life
and
identity
once
again,
before
he
can
think
of
recreating
an
identity
of
his
own.
Before
we
come
to
have
another
close
look
at
the
novel’s
primary
text,
we
42
Boorsch,
Jean.
“Romain
Gary.”
Yale
French
Studies
8,
What’s
Novel
in
the
Novel
(1951):
51-‐55,
52.
107
can
mention
here
that
Romain
Gary
had
to
grapple
with
identity
himself,
just
like
his
characters:
At
a
certain
point,
Gary
concluded
that,
as
a
writer
at
least,
he
was
tired
of
being
the
famous
Romain
Gary.
He
wanted
to
be
someone
else.
As
he
put
it,
quoting
from
the
Polish
novelist
Witold
Gombrowicz,
“there
comes
a
day
when
a
writer
is
held
prisoner
by
‘la
gueule
qu’on
lui
a
faite,’
the
mug
which
the
critics
have
given
him
–
an
appearance
which
has
nothing
to
do
with
his
work
or
himself.
(RG
185)
For
one,
the
author
exposes
the
idea
that
people
define
each
other,
on
the
basis
of
first
impressions,
on
hearsay
or
on
their
own
standards
and
once
an
impression
has
been
created
that
perception
of
another
individual
seems
to
be
set
in
stone.
On
the
one
hand,
people
cling
of
course
to
the
idea
that
their
impression
of
another
person
is
accurate,
because
everybody
wants
to
be
right
in
his
assumptions
about
the
world.
Additionally,
people
are
creatures
of
habit.
Consequently,
it
is
much
easier
to
assume
that
a
person
is
always
the
same,
because
we
can
then
react
in
a,
to
us,
similar
way
too,
which
makes
human
interaction
and
life,
in
general,
much
easier,
albeit
less
interesting
and
challenging.
In
addition,
not
only
the
critics
label
the
author,
but
the
readers
define
the
narrator
of
a
text,
too.
The
reader
conceives
and
defines
the
narrator.
The
initial
image
that
the
narrator
has
adopted
because
of
the
reader
becomes
challenging
to
alter
throughout
the
later
reading
process.
Of
course,
it
is
natural
that
the
reader
views
the
narrator
in
a
more
or
less
consistent
way
throughout
the
novel,
because
it
is
the
reader,
who
interprets
the
character’s
actions
and
attitude
and
since
the
reader’s
character
and
nature
remains
little
altered
for
the
duration
of
the
reading
process,
his
view
of
the
narrator
also
remains
stable.
Additionally,
the
fact
that
the
reader’s
perception
of
a
character
is
settled
at
the
beginning
of
the
novel,
and
remains
consistent
throughout
the
reading
operation
facilitates
the
creation
of
a
convincing
and
coherent
child
narrator.
If
a
reader
accepts
that
the
narrator
of
a
certain
text
is
a
ten-‐year-‐old
child,
the
reader
has
that
image
in
mind,
whenever
he
sits
down
to
read
that
text.
When
the
narrator
acts
or
speaks
differently,
than
we
would
expect
a
child
to
act,
then
the
reader
still
subconsciously
accepts
the
text
as
a
child’s
narrative,
because
his
mind
associates
the
words
with
the
image
of
a
minor.
That
and
the
reader’s
desire
for
consistency
and
logic
lead
him
to
accept
any
way
of
expression,
as
that
of
a
child
108
narrator,
because
the
reader
wants
to
pursue
the
way
of
least
confusion.
Earlier
on,
we
have
argued
that
it
does
not
depend
on
how
realistic
a
child
narrator
is,
in
order
for
the
reader
to
accept
him,
but
on
the
novel’s
coherency
as
a
whole.
Now,
we
can
add
that
it
does
not
just
depend
on
the
author’s
talent
to
render
a
novel
or
a
story
internally
coherent,
but
also
on
the
reader’s
ability
to
make
sense
of
the
story
as
a
whole
and
to
ignore
inconsistencies
as
a
necessary
part
of
the
story.
Romain
Gary
has
felt
constricted
by
the
image
the
critics
have
given
him.
Similarly,
the
author
also
manages
to
convey
the
fate
of
those
people
that
have
been
defined
and
classified
as
substandard,
by
society.
Romain
Gary
illustrates
the
lives
of
prostitutes
and
immigrants,
who
have
been
stigmatized.
When
a
person
has
defined
another
person,
then
it
might
be
disagreeable
to
be
always
viewed
from
the
same
perspective
and
especially,
if
people
have
understood
you
wrongly,
according
to
your
own
perception
of
yourself.
Yet,
if
the
stigma
a
person
has
given
another
individual
is
positive,
like
in
Romain
Gary’s
case,
then
the
consequences
are
still
mostly
beneficial.
For
example,
if
the
critics
view
Romain
Gary
as
a
generally
talented
writer,
then
he
enjoys
the
liberty
to
produce
a
mediocre
text
and
critics
will
view
his
creation
as
a
one-‐off
disappointment,
even
if
in
fact
his
masterpieces
were
one-‐offs.
Thus,
people
can
also
benefit
from
a
stigma
that
other
people
(falsely)
attribute
to
them.
In
contrast,
it
can
also
be
the
case
that
people
attract
negative
stigmatization,
even
as
a
whole
group,
like
Arab
people
in
The
Life
Before
Us.
In
that
case,
the
stigma
a
person
attracts
does
not
depend
on
individuality,
character,
and
personal
attitude
anymore,
but
on
social
and
ethnical
background.
Additionally,
the
way
people
portray
themselves,
by
the
way
they
dress,
triggers
stigmatization
by
others:
They
looked
at
me
like
a
lump
of
shit.
My
rags
were
terrible,
I
felt
it
right
away.
I
had
a
cap
that
was
always
standing
up
in
back
because
I
have
too
much
hair
and
an
overcoat
that
hung
down
to
my
heels.
When
you
snatch
garmentry,
you
haven’t
got
time
to
measure
if
the
stuff
is
too
big
or
too
little,
you’re
in
a
hurry.
They
didn’t
say
anything,
but
we
weren’t
from
the
same
block.
(RG
147/
148)
An
adult
narrator
could
just
as
easily
address
the
reality
that
there
are
discrepancies
between
social
classes
and
that
there
are
a
large
number
of
adults
and
children,
who
suffer
from
financial
hardship.
Yet,
turning
a
child
into
the
109
110
social
connections
and
no
remaining
family.
People
all
her
life
have
trampled
Momo’s
caretaker.
Her
sexual
relations
were
commonly
devoid
of
love,
since
they
were
based
on
business
and
she
has
never
managed
to
form
any
deeper
human
relations.
Thus,
it
is
debatable
to
what
extent
Madame
Rosa
is
capable
of
forming
a
deep
inter
human
connection
with
Momo,
when
she
has
never
experienced
or
learned
how
to
react
to
other
people
without
being
on
guard.
Consequently,
one
can
say
that
the
characters
and
the
reader
idealize
the
relationship
between
Momo
and
Madame
Rosa,
when
they
identify
their
bond
as
‘perfect.’
Viewing
the
relation
between
adult
and
child
as
an
opportunistic
contract
would
offer
a
bleak
outlook
on
the
world,
but
would
sound
more
plausible,
as
a
conclusion
to
the
foregoing
analysis
of
their
union.
One
could
say
that
the
relationship
between
Madame
Rosa
and
Momo
is
not
one
founded
on
human
love
and
a
necessity
for
warmth,
but
that
it
is
an
alliance
created
out
of
fear;
the
fear
of
facing
the
world
alone
and
of
dying
alone.
Both
characters
are
in
need
of
support,
because
one
person
has
been
exploited
and
both
have
been
rejected
by
society.
So
both
characters
hold
on
to
each
other
and
develop
the
illusion
that
they
bring
each
other
comfort
and
warmth.
Moreover,
the
relationship
between
Momo
and
Madame
Rosa
is
tainted
by
social
and
financial
problems.
It
may
be
true
that
Madame
Rosa
and
Momo’s
problems
are
different
to
that
of
a
regular
‘couple,’
yet
they
do
have
problems,
which
they
would
not
have
as
individual
people.
Of
course,
this
diagnosis
sounds
negative
at
first,
but
it
also
illustrates
that
there
is
some
sort
of
love
between
Momo
and
Madame
Rosa,
which
makes
them
stay
together,
although
they
could
steer
clear
of
certain
hardship,
by
going
their
separate
ways,
like
Momo,
who
could
escape
the
encounter
with
death,
if
he
left
Madame
Rosa.
Since
Momo
is
a
child,
he
allows
Madame
Rosa
to
act
out
of
pure
love,
because
he
cannot
offer
her
anything:
the
child
cannot
pay
Madame
Rosa
any
money,
nor
can
he
protect
her
from
any
harm.
Seen
from
that
point
of
view,
the
relationship
between
the
two
characters
is
that
of
pure
affection,
because
they
allow
each
other
to
be,
who
they
are,
without
asking
questions
or
without
demanding
anything.
The
relationship
between
Momo
and
Madame
Rosa
expands
even
to
that
extent
that
Momo
completely
identifies
himself
with
his
former
caretaker:
‘[I
]was
cold
during
the
night.
I
got
up
and
put
another
blanket
over
111
[her]’
(RG
163).
Now,
Momo
has
taken
up
the
position
of
caretaker.
Earlier
on,
we
have
argued
that
Momo
has
nothing
to
offer
Madame
Rosa,
but
this
scene
illustrates
that
Momo
has
to
offer
his
full
dedication
to
and
investment
in
a
relationship.
This
attitude
stands
in
contrast
to
our
current
materialistic
21st
century
stance.
Moreover,
the
role
reversal
between
Madame
Rosa
and
Momo
only
works,
because
Momo
is
a
child.
If
Momo
were
an
adult
narrator
the
full
affectionate
effect
of
one
person
caring
for
another
would
be
lost,
because
we
expect
adults
to
look
after
each
other
in
times
of
illness,
but
we
assume
that
children
despair
in
such
a
situation
and
do
not
know
how
to
react.
Of
course,
this
assumption
is
a
generalization,
but
the
point
I
want
to
make
is
that
a
child,
who
merges
his
identity
to
such
an
extent
with
a
grown
up
that
he
feels
the
need
to
cover
her
when
he
feels
cold,
appeals
more
to
the
reader’s
sentiment,
than
an
adult
carrying
out
the
same
action.
Momo
appeals
to
the
reader’s
common
sense
and
shows
that
the
obvious
and
plain
is
at
times
the
only
route
to
pursue:
‘Madame
Rosa’s
absences
were
getting
longer
and
longer,
and
sometimes
she
didn’t
feel
anything
for
hours
on
end.
[…]
I’d
sit
on
the
stool
beside
her,
take
her
hand,
and
wait
for
her
to
come
back’
(RG
98).
As
I
have
argued
earlier
on,
children
do
not
feel
the
need
to
act
according
to
social
conventions,
because
they
have
no
reference
point
to
compare
to.
If
children
have
a
well-‐developed
opinion
of
what
is
ethically
and
socially
acceptable,
within
their
cultural
context,
then
the
child’s
level
of
consciousness
has
been
fostered
by
adult
teaching
or
role
model
behaviour.
In
Momo’s
case,
the
child
had
to
develop
his
own
ethical
standards,
based
on
natural
intuition
and
on
personal
experience.
Momo’s
age
and
his
social
situation
prevent
him
from
seeking
medical
help
that
would
maybe
be
superfluous,
since
in
vain,
anyway.
Thus,
by
putting
a
child
narrator
at
the
centre
of
his
novel,
Romain
Gary
manages
to
bring
his
story
to
a
standstill,
because
the
child
character
lacks
the
maturity
and
experience
to
resort
to
any
action.
The
reader
and
the
characters
get
the
chance
to
pause
for
a
moment
and
to
assimilate
or
absorb
the
story’s
events.
The
plain
and
fanciless
is
highlighted,
as
the
most
effective
remedy.
The
social
and
financial
security
that
people
strive
to
attain
does
not
necessarily
lead
to
genuine
human
understanding,
emotional
maturity,
and
security.
Children
as
young
as
ten,
like
Momo,
learn
how
112
113
one’s
date
of
birth
makes
more
sense
in
relation
to
a
child.
An
adult,
who
has
succeeded
in
constructing
a
personally
balanced
life
style,
is
not
defined
by
his
origin
anymore.
An
adult
can
construct
and
justify
his
identity
in
relation
to
his
social
network
of
friends
and
partners,
to
his
education
and
work
or
to
his
religious
disposition
or
social
attitude.
A
child
however
does
not
have
many
parameters
to
fix
his
identity
onto.
Momo
says:
That’s
what
started
me
worrying
about
my
mother.
Everybody
seemed
to
have
one
but
me.
I
began
getting
stomach
cramps
and
convulsions
to
make
her
come
and
see
me.
On
the
sidewalk
across
the
street
there
was
a
kid
with
a
ball,
who
told
me
his
mother
always
came
to
see
him
when
he
had
a
stomach
ache.
I
had
myself
a
stomach
ache,
but
it
didn’t
get
me
anything.
(RG
4)
The
child
narrator
can
comment
on
his
own
internal
reflections
that
lead
to
the
actions
that
the
reader
and
the
people
surrounding
him
perceive.
An
adult
narrator
could
also
observe
the
development
of
a
child,
who
was
separated
from
his
biological
parents
at
birth.
Yet,
the
focus
on
the
child’s
internal
world
would
be
lost
in
that
case.
In
contrast
to
the
relationship
between
Madame
Rosa
and
Momo
stands
the
relationship
between
Momo’s
parents.
At
the
beginning
of
the
book,
the
reader
assumes
that
the
identity
of
Momo’s
father
is
unknown,
but
the
father
suddenly
appears
on
Madame
Rosa’s
doorstep
and
discloses
the
fact
that
he
has
killed
the
child’s
mother,
who
was
also
a
prostitute:
‘I
acted
in
a
fit
of
jealousy.
Think
of
it.
Up
to
twenty
tricks
a
day.
In
the
end
I
got
jealous
and
killed
her.
I
admit
it.
But
I
am
not
responsible.
I
was
certified
by
the
best
French
doctors.
I
didn’t
remember
a
thing
afterwards.
I
loved
her
madly.
I
couldn’t
live
without
her’
(RG
124).
Momo
also
loves
Madame
Rosa
madly,
but
he
does
not
resort
to
killing
her,
but
to
prolonging
her
life,
beyond
death,
because
Momo
keeps
watch
by
Madame
Rosa’s
side
for
several
days
after
her
death.
The
child’s
way
of
altering
his
reality
is
more
harmless,
but
equally
mad.
The
two
scenes
illustrate
that
the
fear
of
losing
a
person
can
lead
people
of
all
ages
to
resort
to
extraordinary
behaviour.
Momo’s
situation
shows
that
the
new
generation
and
the
old
generation
are
equally
affected
when
middle-‐
aged
people
fail
to
organize
their
life
according
to
socially
accepted
conventions
within
a
certain
cultural
setting.
114
Tanner
Tony
originally
analyzed
Huckleberry
Finn’s
situation,
when
he
said
that
indeed
Huck
is
a
modern
type
of
hero:
a
hero
with
no
power
to
remedy
the
unbearable
wrongs
he
sees
in
the
world,
a
hero
by
dint
of
his
inner
honesty
and
the
equality
of
his
impartial
sensitivity
only
-‐
a
person
who
is
heroic
in
flight.
He
is
detached
and
lonely
as
all
innocents
are
and
his
allegiance
is
to
an
inner
range
of
feeling,
but
this
is
not
to
say
that
he
is
fully
immersed
in
the
world
at
large.
(TT
212)
On
a
first
level,
Momo
is
unable
to
alter
reality,
because
he
is
a
child
and
not
in
the
leading
position
that
could
allow
him
to
take
substantial
action.
Consequently,
a
child
narrator
is
a
perfect
fit
for
the
role
of
modern
hero,
as
Tony
Tanner
sees
him,
because
the
child
can
portray
the
current
human
condition,
without
offering
an
alleged
miracle
cure.
Momo’s
character
and
situation
is
comparable
to
Huckleberry
Finn’s
existence.
Moreover,
Momo
is
also
detached
from
his
roots,
because
he
does
not
know
anything
about
his
parents
and
he
feels
lonely
in
a
world
that
he
does
not
understand.
He
tries
to
find
comfort,
by
making
friends
with
a
prostitute,
but
at
the
same
time,
Momo
needs
to
emotionally
detach
himself
from
Madame
Rosa,
in
order
to
protect
himself
from
too
much
hurt,
because
the
old
woman
is
about
to
die.
In
the
end,
the
reader
sees
that
Momo
is
still
a
child
who
cannot
consciously
make
the
decision
to
create
the
necessary
distance
between
himself
and
Madame
Rosa,
because
he
remains
with
her
dead
body
in
the
cellar
for
a
week
and
keeps
watch:
I
spread
some
makeup
on
her
lips
and
cheeks
and
painted
her
eyebrows
the
way
she
liked.
I
made
her
eyelids
blue
and
white
and
pasted
little
stars
on
them
like
she
did.
I
tried
to
put
on
false
eyelashes
but
they
wouldn’t
stick.
I
could
see
she’d
stopped
breathing,
but
it
was
all
the
same
to
me,
I
loved
her
even
without
breathing.
(RG
178)
Part
of
the
readers
might
argue
that
in
this
passage,
Momo
tries
to
alter
reality,
because
he
is
blinded
by
love
and
he
does
not
want
to
accept
that
the
most
important
person
in
his
life
has
died.
In
contrast,
Momo’s
wish
for
Madame
Rosa
to
continue
living
can
also
be
seen,
as
the
child’s
deep
fear
to
face
the
world
on
his
own
and
is
maybe
more
driven
by
internal
anxiety,
than
by
a
deeper
emotional
connection
to
Madame
Rosa.
In
addition,
putting
makeup
on
Madame
Rosa’s
face
115
gives
Momo
something
to
occupy
himself
with
and
to
take
his
mind
off
her
death.
The
layers
of
make-‐up
help
to
conceal
reality
and
make
it
easier
for
the
child
to
look
at
the
dead
body.
Yet,
on
the
other
hand,
Momo
tries
to
‘embellish’
his
friend
and
to
make
her
look
the
way
‘she
liked
it.’
Momo
does
not
arbitrarily
put
colour
on
Madame
Rosa’s
face,
but
he
tries
to
reproduce
Madame
Rosa’s
reality
and
not
embellish
his
own.
Seen
from
that
perspective,
Momo’s
love
is
altruistic,
since
he
does
not
benefit
from
putting
make-‐up
on
Madame
Rosa’s
face,
because
that
will
not
bring
her
back
to
life
and
it
will
not
secure
Momo’s
future,
in
any
way.
The
child
keeping
watch,
by
the
dead
woman’s
body,
reminds
the
reader
indeed
of
‘romantic
love’
and
appeals
to
the
reader’s
sympathy.
The
reader
is
observing
the
intimate
moment,
when
a
child
is
confronted
with
the
death
of
a
beloved
one,
for
the
first
time,
and
is
struggling
to
come
to
terms
with
death’s
mercilessness.
In
that
respect,
the
reader
can
also
understand
the
scene
as
overtly
romantic,
like
Jane
McKee
has
argued
earlier
on.
It
depends
on
the
reader’s
attitude
to
romanticism
and
to
kitsch,
to
which
extent
he
allows
sentimental
scenes
to
be
part
of
a
novel,
without
condemning
the
whole
text
as
an
overtly
emotional
tearjerker.
In
relation
to
child
narrators,
the
final
scene
between
Momo
and
Madame
Rosa
only
works
to
perfection
between
a
child
and
an
adult.
If
an
adult
narrator
would
tamper
with
a
dead
person’s
body,
the
reader
would
feel
embarrassed
and
the
passage
would
allude
to
necrophilia
or
sexually
deviant
actions.
How
people
define
love
and
which
forces
motivate
people
to
remain
together
depends
on
each
individual.
Yet,
which
becomes
clear
in
the
relationship
between
Momo
and
Madame
Rosa
is
the
idea
that
the
novel’s
core
relationship
setting
can
only
function
with
the
cast
of
a
child
narrator.
If
Madame
Rosa
had
been
living
with
an
adult,
the
innocence
would
have
been
removed
from
the
relationship
and
Madame
Rosa’s
past
sexuality
would
have
moved
into
the
foreground,
because
an
intimate
relationship
between
two
adults
evokes
images
of
sexual
involvement.
Even
if
the
characters
would
affirm
their
platonic
friendship,
the
reader
would
still
associate
two
adults
living
together
with
the
idea
of
a
shared
sexuality,
especially
if
one
of
the
two
had
formerly
worked
as
a
prostitute.
Of
course,
interpreting
adult
interaction
with
a
dead
corpse
as
sexually
deviant,
while
allowing
the
child
the
freedom
to
come
to
terms
with
death,
in
his
own
manner
and
time,
is
a
personal
116
interpretation
and
varies
from
one
reader
to
another.
Additionally,
the
reader’s
interpretation
also
depends
on
his
culture
and
social
background.
Thus,
the
device
of
the
child
narrator
might
function
well
as
transmitter
of
a
message
in
one
culture,
while
another
culture
might
reject
the
idea
of
a
child
closely
interacting
with
death.
The
reader’s
reaction
to
Momo
and
Madame
Rosa’s
relationship
beyond
death
also
reveals
the
reader’s
cultural
setting
and
his
social
attitude
towards
death
and
of
how
to
deal
with
illness
and
bereavement:
Then
she
didn’t
say
anything
at
all,
just
sat
there
looking
empty
at
the
wall
and
shitting
and
pissing
in
her
chair.
There’s
something
I’ve
got
to
tell
you.
Such
things
shouldn’t
be.
That’s
my
honest
opinion.
I’ll
never
understand
why
abortion
is
only
allowed
for
the
young
and
not
for
the
old.
In
my
opinion
the
guy
in
America
who
beat
the
world’s
vegetable
record
was
worse
than
Jesus,
because
he
stayed
on
the
cross
for
seventeen
years
and
then
some.
In
my
opinion,
there
is
nothing
crummier
than
ramming
life
down
the
throats
of
defenceless
people
who’ve
had
enough.
(RG
175)
On
the
one
hand,
Momo’s
previous
comments
about
prostitution
and
now
his
comments
about
euthanasia
sound
inoffensive
to
the
reader,
because
Momo’s
comments
are
just
that:
comments.
Momo
talks
in
a
very
factual
way
about
prostitution
and
euthanasia
and
the
reader
buys
into
the
child’s
non-‐judgmental
description
of
his
environment.
The
author
manages
to
create
this
effect,
because
Momo
is
a
child.
Although
Momo
grows
up
in
a
milieu
nerved
with
sexual
deviance
and
daily
hardship,
he
still
has
limited
access
to
the
complete
truth
and
reality
behind
the
scenes.
Momo
explains
what
he
sees
and
hears,
but
he
lacks
the
understanding
of
the
entire
picture,
in
order
to
make
full
sense
of
his
experiences.
Momo
is
unaware
of
the
political
debate
related
to
euthanasia
and
of
the
question
at
what
point
a
person’s
life-‐sustaining
machines
can
be
switched
off.
Yet,
there
is
an
undeniable
truth
in
the
child’s
words.
Although
the
reader
is
aware
that
there
is
actually
an
adult
author
at
the
source
of
Momo’s
words,
the
reader
still
accepts
the
words
as
those
of
a
child,
because
Momo
is
not
debating
or
pondering
the
question
or
referring
to
political
correctness,
like
adults
commonly
do,
but
the
child
narrator
in
this
case
is
just
plainly
stating
his
truth
and
expects
his
readers
to
accept
his
reality
and
outlook
on
the
world.
In
contrast,
we
have
earlier
on
said
that
Momo
points
out
social
shortcomings
in
a
very
factual
way.
However,
the
effect
that
is
created
in
the
reader
is
one
of
shock,
because
the
child
character
uses
very
strong
language
to
get
117
his
point
across.
Romain
Gary
puts
words
and
expressions
like
‘shitting,’
‘pissing,’
and
‘ramming
life
down
the
throat
of
a
person,’
in
his
narrator’s
mouth.
As
a
consequence,
it
is
not
the
child’s
talent
for
debate
nor
his
logical
argumentation
that
convince
the
reader
of
the
narrator’s
firm
point
of
view,
but
the
crude
language
that
we
do
not
usually
associate
with
a
child’s
world,
but
that
accurately
mirrors
the
barbaric
conditions
that
the
narrator
is
addressing
in
his
speech.
Romain
Gary
employs
his
child
narrator
as
a
tool
that
is
meant
to
disclose
social
questions,
but
that
allows
the
author
to
retain
any
judgment
that
could
influence
the
reader’s
own
thinking.
When
a
story
is
narrated
by
a
child,
the
reader
is
urged
to
make
up
his
own
mind
and
to
ponder
the
accuracy
of
the
child’s
statement
within
his
own
current
social,
ethical
and
ethnical
context.
In
addition
to
the
love
between
Momo
and
Madame
Rosa,
there
is
Momo’s
affection
for
his
dog:
when
I
took
him
out
walking,
I
felt
important,
because
I
was
all
he
had
in
the
world.
I
loved
him
so
much
that
I
finally
gave
him
away.
I
was
nine
by
then,
or
thereabouts,
and
at
that
age
you
begin
to
think,
except
maybe
if
you
are
happy.
Besides,
between
you
and
me,
without
wanting
to
hurt
anybody’s
feelings,
it
was
gloomy
at
Madame
Rosa’s,
even
when
you
were
used
to
it.
So
when
Super
started
growing
on
me,
emotionally
speaking,
I
decided
to
give
him
a
better
life.
I’d
have
done
the
same
for
myself
if
I’d
been
able.
(RG
13)
This
scene
also
just
functions,
because
Momo
is
a
child
character
and
narrator,
because
this
scene
clearly
illustrates
to
which
extent
the
child
assumes
mature
thinking,
in
contrast
to
the
adult,
who
remains
egoistic
and
possessive.
Momo
identifies
the
dog’s
miserable
living
conditions
and
gives
him
away,
because
he
‘loves
him
so
much.’
Momo
achieves,
what
Madame
Rosa
is
incapable
of,
namely
separating
her
own
fear
from
Momo’s
life
and
‘setting
him
free,’
in
order
to
lead
a
happier,
more
untroubled
life.
If
Momo
were
an
adult,
he
could
‘set
himself
free,’
by
just
walking
out
on
Madame
Rosa,
but
the
fact
that
he
is
a
child
binds
him
to
his
environment
to
a
certain
extent.
Of
course,
there
are
also
adults,
who
remain
frozen
and
stuck
in
their
daily
routine,
although
they
feel
miserable.
Yet,
it
is
easier
for
an
adult
to
fend
for
himself,
than
for
a
child.
Especially,
because
a
child
is
more
emotionally
attached
to
the
people
that
have
shaped
his
early
years
and
thus,
it
becomes
a
challenge
for
a
child
to
walk
out
on
his
educator.
118
define
who
he
is.
On
the
one
hand,
Momo
has
to
act
like
and
adult,
because
he
grows
up
in
a
little
inviting
environment:
‘I’m
not
a
child
in
the
first
place.
I’m
the
son
of
a
whore
and
my
father
killed
my
mother.
When
a
kid
knows
that,
he
knows
everything
there
is
to
know
and
he’s
not
a
child
anymore’
(RG
156).
Of
course,
in
that
respect,
the
question
arises
if
knowledge
can
make
a
child
more
mature,
or
if
a
child
remains
in
a
minor’s
frame
of
mind
for
the
time
being.,
until
he
can
process
the
new
information.
Here
we
can
say
that
knowledge
or
orally
transmitted
facts
themselves
do
not
change
a
child’s
level
of
maturity.
However,
information
like
the
social
history
of
Momo’s
parents
lead
to
and
are
linked
to
a
different
social
setting,
which
the
child
is
propelled
into.
This
change
in
atmosphere
and
setting
alter
the
child’s
level
of
development
and
maturity
and
not
knowledge
itself.
On
the
other
hand,
Madame
Rosa
tells
Momo
that
he
is
four
years
younger
than
he
actually
is,
in
order
to
keep
him
by
her
side.
The
reader
understands
that
treating
people
like
children
manipulates
them
to
such
an
extent
that
they
become
dependant
of
other
people’s
support.
The
age
you
feel
is
always
conditioned,
by
what
you
are
told
to
act
like
and
by
what
other
people
expect
you
to
act
like.
In
119
Momo’s
case,
the
people
surrounding
him
treat
him
alternately
as
a
child
or
as
an
adult,
depending
on
their
needs
and
on
their
personal
demands.
Thus,
Momo
clings
to
Arthur
his
umbrella
and
similarly
to
his
childhood,
because
growing
up
would
also
mean
deciding
on
an
identity
of
his
own,
which
he
has
not
had
the
chance
to
construct
so
far,
because
his
caretakers
have
alternately
altered
his
identity,
in
order
to
satisfy
their
needs.
On
the
one
hand,
the
reader
wonders,
why
Momo
clings
to
his
childhood
to
such
a
degree,
because
his
youth
is
certainly
not
desirable
in
many
aspects.
On
the
other
hand,
Momo
currently
has
a
place
to
live
and
a
person
he
belongs
to.
If
Momo
were
an
adult,
he
would
need
to
fend
for
himself.
He
does
not
have
any
education,
nor
does
he
know,
which
direction
to
pursue
in
life.
It
might
be
a
generalization,
but
children
tend
to
orientate
their
lives,
in
relation
to
their
parents,
or
to
the
broader
circle
of
the
grown-‐ups
surrounding
them.
Either
children
want
to
be
like
their
role
models
or
they
intend
to
walk
in
a
completely
opposite
direction.
In
Momo’s
case,
the
child
cannot
adopt
the
same
lifestyle,
as
his
foster
mother.
Yet
attempting
to
get
an
education
or
to
start
an
apprenticeship
is
a
scary
thought
for
Momo,
too,
because
he
has
nobody
in
his
immediate
surroundings,
who
has
taken
up
that
path
and
whom
he
could
aspire
to.
Consequently,
it
is
understandable
that
Momo
hesitates
to
grow
up.
Moreover,
the
fact
that
Momo
is
still
a
child
allows
him
to
attract
people
and
primarily,
Madame
Rosa’s
attention.
If
Momo
accepts
the
fact
that
he
is
actually
older
than
he
thought
he
was,
he
also
accepts
the
loss
of
Madame
Rosa’s
care.
Momo’s
love
for
his
childhood
reflects,
at
the
same
time,
his
affection
for
Madame
Rosa:
‘I
can
assure
you
that
some
whores
are
the
best
of
mothers,
because
it’s
a
change
from
their
customers
and
besides
a
kid
gives
them
a
future.
Of
course
there
are
some
that
drop
out
of
sight
and
you
never
hear
of
them
again,
but
that
doesn’t
mean
they’re
not
dead
or
haven’t
got
some
other
excuse’
(RG
30).
Vice-‐versa,
Madame
Rosa
has
not
disclosed
Momo’s
real
age
to
the
child,
because
children
‘give
their
parents
a
future,’
as
Momo
accurately
observes.
Although
Momo
is
not
Madame
Rosa’s
biological
child,
he
still
secures
the
woman’s
future,
because
he
looks
after
her
until
her
death.
In
a
way,
this
scenario
is
only
possible,
because
Momo
is
still
a
child,
or
because
Momo
believes
that
he
is
younger,
than
he
actually
is
and
consequently,
does
not
want
to
leave
‘home’
yet.
If
Momo
were
an
adult
120
narrator,
then
he
would
comment
on
Madame
Rosa’s
physical
and
mental
decline,
but
he
would
be
more
physically
and
emotionally
detached.
An
adult
narrator
would
react
in
a
more
factual,
practically
oriented
way
and
would
not
colour
the
story
in
such
a
romantically
caring
way.
In
contrast,
one
could
also
argue
that
an
adult
narrator
could
even
look
at
his
childhood
in
a
more
nostalgic
way,
than
a
child
narrator,
who
examines
his
immediate
and
current
situation,
because
looking
back
at
the
past
commonly
induces
people
to
embellish
their
memories.
Finally,
Momo
says:
‘people
need
millions
and
millions
to
feel
concerned,
and
you
can’t
blame
them,
because
little
things
don’t
amount
to
much’
(RG
146).
Yet,
by
putting
a
child
narrator
at
the
centre
of
his
novel,
Romain
Gary
manages
to
show
that
‘little
things’
do
amount
to
much,
because
Momo
achieves
to
reach
and
illicit
the
thinking
process
of
a
large
amount
of
readers.
Even
if
we
are
critical
and
point
out
that
Momo
is
the
author’s
construct
and
that
it
is
not
really
a
child,
who
reaches
the
audience,
but
an
adult,
then
we
can
still
say
that
it
is
one
single
person
that
reaches
a
larger
amount
of
people
and
consequently,
‘little
things
still
amount
to
much.’
In
conclusion,
Momo’s
narrative
is
on
the
one
hand,
an
apprenticeship
novel,
because
the
novel
recounts
the
childhood
and
young
adulthood
of
a
character
in
order
to
show
how
he
or
she
develops
and
changes
through
experience
and
spiritual
crisis.
It
emphasizes
the
importance
of
early
years
upon
later
choices
and
behavior,
and
the
gradual
elaboration
of
a
philosophy
of
life.43
Françoise
Grellet
highlights
that
‘such
novels
usually
end
when
heroes
have
reached
a
sense
of
identity
and
a
clearer
understanding
of
their
own
values
and
purposes’
(FG
126).
Of
course,
Momo
grows
because
of
his
experiences
and
he
survives
Madame
Rosa’s
death.
Since
Momo
has
access
to
all
kinds
of
narcotic
substances,
the
child
could
just
as
well
have
killed
himself,
by
taking
an
overdose
of
drugs
or
alcohol,
because
he
cannot
cope
with
the
emotional
pressure
he
is
exposed
to
and
because
he
has
no
other
person
to
turn
to
after
Madame
Rosa’s
death.
So
in
a
way,
we
can
say
that
Momo
has
overcome
his
‘spiritual
crisis’
and
43
Grellet,
Françoise.
Literature
in
English:
Anthologie
des
Littératures
du
Monde
Anglophone.
Paris:
Hachette
Supérieur.
2002,
126
–
Further
references
are
included
in
the
text
(FG).
121
that
the
experiences
he
had
to
go
through
have
helped
the
child
to
grow
into
an
adult,
whose
experiences
have
rendered
him
more
resilient
towards
the
world’s
challenges.
Yet,
the
novel
ends
with
Madame
Rosa’s
death
and
the
reader
remains
in
the
dark
about
Momo’s
future.
Françoise
Grellet
argues
that
at
the
end
of
an
apprenticeship
novel,
the
hero
has
reached
‘a
sense
of
identity
and
a
clearer
understanding
of
his
own
values
and
purposes.’
Yet,
in
Momo’s
case,
the
child
had
to
suffer
from
such
a
traumatic
loss
and
has
been
abandoned
by
his
parents
and
then
by
Madame
Rosa.
Although
Momo’s
foster
mother
has
died
a
natural
death,
to
Momo
her
death
still
embodies
a
personal
loss.
Consequently,
the
reader
is
left
to
wonder
whether
the
child
does
not
feel
like
unworthy
of
stable
attention
and
consistent
adult
devotion
and
whether
he
will
ever
develop
a
‘sense
of
identity,’
because
people
have
lied
to
him
about
his
self
all
his
life.
The
title
The
Life
Before
Us,
reminds
the
reader
of
our
lives
that
lie
ahead
of
us.
Every
day
is
a
new
beginning,
yet
the
question
remains
whether
every
day
is
influenced
and
already
tainted
by
previous
experiences.
Jane
McKee
sums
up
that
in
the
midst
of
all
this
diversity,
however,
there
is
a
fundamental
unity,
provided
on
the
one
hand
by
a
permanent
concern
with
the
problems
of
mankind
and
with
the
human
situation
in
general
and
on
the
other
by
a
creative
imagination
dominated
by
a
love
of
what
is
strange,
colourful,
beautiful,
grotesque
or
in
any
way
unusual
or
outstanding.
(JMK
60)
Momo’s
narrative
illustrates
that
the
past
makes
up
part
of
the
future,
but
that
one’s
actions
can
alter
the
course
of
events,
on
a
daily
basis;
subtly
but
effectively.
The
reader
observes
Momo
and
his
choices
and
we
see
how
his
life
develops,
by
Madame
Rosa’s
side,
and
at
certain
points,
the
reader
feels
the
urge
to
advise
Momo
to
get
adult
help
and
to
spare
himself
the
encounter
with
death.
Yet,
on
the
other
hand,
the
reader
is
silenced,
because
he
cannot
interfere
and
the
reader
has
to
acknowledge
that
Momo’s
life
and
character
would
not
be
what
they
are,
if
Momo’s
life
had
been
directed
by
other
people
or
by
different
adults.
The
child’s
narrative
achieves
to
convey
the
message
that
young
lives
can
be
lived
with
limited
adult
influence
and
that
the
outcome
is
each
time
unique
and
sufficient
in
itself.
The
fact
that
Momo
is
a
child
narrator
creates
a
level
of
suspense
that
expands
beyond
the
story
itself,
because
there
is
Momo’s
whole
life,
which
is
still
waiting
122
for
him,
after
the
story
in
the
novel
has
already
ended,
so
that
the
reader
is
left
to
wonder,
what
will
happen
of
Momo
in
later
years
to
come.
123
124
4.2.
Extremely
Loud
&
Incredibly
Close,
by
Jonathan
Safran
Foer
The
21st
century
novel
Extremely
Loud
&
Incredibly
Close
was
written
by
the
young
American
author
Jonathan
Safran
Foer.
Extremely
Loud
&
Incredibly
Close
stands
in
contrast
to
The
Life
Before
Us,
because
the
two
novels
stem
from
authors
with
different
social,
ethical
and
cultural
background.
Consequently,
the
reader
might
think
that
the
two
texts
differ
greatly,
in
terms
of
their
content
and
in
terms
of
the
way
their
content
is
presented.
Yet,
Jonathan
Safran
Foer
and
Romain
Gary
have
both
chosen
to
put
a
child
narrator
at
the
centre
of
their
novels.
It
is
understandable
that
an
author
like
Romain
Gary
wanted
to
put
a
child
at
the
centre
of
his
narrative,
because
it
was
the
author’s
intention
to
voice
social
criticism.
The
figure
of
the
child
narrator
has
allowed
Romain
Gary
to
highlight
the
social
shortcomings
of
his
time
and
social
context,
while
creating
a
certain
amount
of
distance
between
himself
and
his
character’s
ideas.
If
Romain
Gary
had
put
an
adult
narrator
at
the
centre
of
his
novel,
then
critics
could
have
made
a
much
tighter
link
between
himself
and
the
fictional
text.
Of
course,
there
is
no
doubt
that
the
author
always
remains
the
source
of
the
text
that
he
produces,
yet,
the
way
in
which
an
author
presents
his
text
renders
the
author’s
voice
either
more
palpable
or
more
subtle
for
the
reader,
depending
on
the
tool
that
the
author
chooses,
in
order
to
propagate
his
message.
In
the
foregoing
discussions,
we
have
established
the
numerous
literary
advantages
that
a
child
narrator
can
contribute,
in
order
to
render
a
novel
a
success.
Additionally,
we
have
also
highlighted,
why
an
author
like
Romain
Gary
would
resort
to
employing
a
child
narrator.
However,
why
would
Jonathan
Safran
Foer
want
to
use
a
child
character
as
the
transmitter
of
his
novel’s
message?
Although
Jonathan
Safran
Foer
lives
and
works
in
a
different
social
and
cultural
setting,
than
Romain
Gary,
could
it
still
be
the
case
that
the
young
author
wants
to
distance
his
character
from
his
own
persona,
in
order
to
voice
social
criticism
more
freely?
After
all,
Jonathan
Safran
Foer’s
novel
concentrates
on
the
terrorist
attacks
of
9/11
and
discusses
a
delicate
topic.
Moreover,
at
the
beginning
of
the
thesis
at
hand
we
have
argued
that
children
had
to
die
in
real
life,
in
order
to
find
a
literary
voice.
However,
since
Jonathan
Safran
Foer
is
an
author
of
our
modern
times,
the
reader
might
wonder
to
what
extent
an
author
still
needs
to
grant
children
a
voice
nowadays,
since
125
Jonathan
Safran
Foer
lives
in
a
society
that
directs
psychological,
political
and
educational
attention
on
children
anyway.
Yet,
in
contrast,
literature
to
a
great
extent
mirrors
the
reality
of
the
time
in
which
the
text
was
produced.
Consequently,
it
is
logical
that
a
young
modern
author
picks
up
on
his
current
society’s
need
to
discuss
the
child’s
status
and
to
point
out
the
most
beneficial
support
for
young
people.
Yet,
when
I
was
doing
research
and
looking
for
clues
that
could
help
me
to
answer
the
question,
why
Jonathan
Safran
Foer
has
chosen
a
child
narrator
for
his
novel,
I
came
across
answers
for
an
interview
that
Jonathan
Safran
Foer
has
given
a
journalist
for
the
newspaper
Mother
Jones.
In
this
interview,
Jonathan
Safran
Foer
gives
clear
reasons,
why
he
tells
his
story
in
a
child’s
voice.
The
author’s
reasons
contradict
all
of
my
previous
guesses,
but
the
novel’s
success
shows
that
the
author’s
motives
were
founded
on
good
judgement:
Mother
Jones
(MJ):
Did
you
feel
like
you
were
taking
a
risk
dealing
with
9/11
in
Extremely
Loud?
Jonathan
Safran
Foer
(JSF):
Actually,
I
think
it’s
a
greater
risk
not
to
write
about
it.
If
you’re
in
my
position—a
New
Yorker
who
felt
the
event
very
deeply
and
a
writer
who
wants
to
write
about
things
he
feels
deeply
about—I
think
it’s
risky
to
avoid
what’s
right
in
front
of
you.
None
of
the
ways
people
were
talking
about
September
11
felt
right
to
me.
I
don’t
buy
into
the
way
Bush
talks
about
it.
I
don’t
buy
into
the
way
the
9/11
commission
talks
about
it.
It
isn’t
that
I
don’t
believe
them.
It’s
just
that
they’re
not
the
tellings
for
me.44
Politicians
and
people
in
charge
of
controlling
the
situation
have
another
perspective
on
the
events
of
9/11,
than
the
common
citizen,
who
had
to
bare
the
impact
of
the
attack
on
a
different
level.
Adults,
who
are
not
in
a
position
to
find
a
solution
against
terrorist
attacks
or
to
prevent
future
attacks,
can
still
go
out
and
work
as
immediate
helpers
on
the
affected
territory.
According
to
Craig
Beyerlein,
‘expressing
solidarity
with
victims
through
volunteering
[…]
helped
to
create
a
meaningful
collective
identity
that
generated
emotional
energy
for
taking
action.’45
Children,
however,
are
removed
from
the
situation
and
it
seems
that
children
are
forgotten
during
the
time
it
takes
for
life
to
take
up
its
routine
again.
Of
course,
this
44
Wolf
Schenk,
Joshua.
“Jonathan
Safran
Foer:
Living
to
Tell
the
Tale.”
Motherjones.com:
impression
does
not
hold
true,
because
psychologists
and
parents
attend
to
children,
when
a
catastrophe
has
taken
place.
Yet,
children
are
removed
from
the
immediate
focus
of
the
media
and
of
the
parents’
attention,
because
the
adults
have
to
attend
to
the
needs
of
the
situation
at
large.
Jonathan
Safran
Foer’s
idea
of
putting
a
child’s
reality
at
the
centre
of
his
novel
reminds
the
reader
of
the
fact
that
the
grander
political
and
social
scheme
also
affects
the
smallest
members
of
society,
even
if
that
truth
does
not
constantly
remain
apparent.
In
contrast,
Laura
Miller
criticizes
Extremely
Loud
&
Incredibly
Close,
when
she
says
that:
in
a
novel
about
the
Holocaust,
this
kind
of
oblique,
even
playful,
strategy
worked,
partly
because
the
subject
has
already
been
so
exhaustively
and
earnestly
explored.
But
September
11,
that
spectacular
monstrosity
plopped
into
the
middle
of
an
ordinary
Tuesday
in
downtown
Manhattan,
is
another
matter.
We’re
still
not
entirely
sure
what
it
signifies,
or
even
if,
philosophically
speaking
(…),
it
might
signify
nothing
at
all.
It
may
just
be
too
early
to
get
cute
in
writing
about
September
11;
on
the
other
hand,
there’s
never
a
good
time
to
get
as
cute
as
Extremely
Loud
&
Incredibly
Close
gets.
(LM)
Laura
Miller
deems
the
child’s
voice
too
cute,
in
order
to
narrate
a
novel
with
a
serious
matter
from
a
child’s
perspective.
The
critic
argues
that
a
shocking
topic
like
9/11
can
only
be
treated
from
a
child’s
perspective,
when
it
has
already
been
discussed
under
any
other,
so-‐called,
serious
or
political
light.
However,
who
decides
which
approach
to
a
painful
event
helps
people
most
effectively
to
deal
with
it?
Why
cannot
a
child’s
light-‐hearted
voice
offer
as
much
relief
and
a
fresh
outlook
on
grief
as
a
solemn
and
serious
attitude?
People
can
be
very
serious
about
and
engaged
in
a
social
issue,
while
at
the
same
time
keeping
their
good
humour.
The
fact
that
Jonathan
Safran
Foer
puts
a
child
at
the
centre
of
his
novel
does
not
mean
that
the
writer
wants
to
trivialize
the
difficulty
of
9/11,
but
the
author’s
text
mirrors
his
interest
in
the
events
of
his
time.
Moreover,
Extremely
Loud
&
Incredibly
Close
also
highlights
the
universal
truth
that
people
speak
about
and
deal
with
problems
differently.
At
least,
the
writer
has
found
a
way
to
express
his
concerns
in
relation
to
the
terrorist
attacks
in
his
country
and
has
managed
to
render
these
worries
palpable,
while
the
majority
of
people
have
been
silenced
by
the
impact
of
9/11.
The
child
narrator
can
also
stand
as
a
metaphor
for
a
small
entity
that
is
repressed.
In
Extremely
Loud
&
Incredibly
Close,
Oskar
represents
the
United
States
of
America.
Like
Oskar,
who
127
has
lost
his
father
and
other
ancestors,
even
before
he
was
born,
the
United
States
have
lost
many
people
through
wars,
illness,
terrorism
and
the
more.
Oskar
operates
as
a
minor
scale
reflection
of
the
country
he
lives
in.
Additionally,
Oskar
Schell
is
taken
as
much
by
surprise,
by
the
attacks
of
9/11,
as
the
United
States
themselves.
Accordingly,
the
United
States
take
on
a
powerless
status,
like
a
child.
This
situation
shows
us
that
the
power
of
an
entity
depends
on
circumstances.
Grown-‐ups,
even
in
high-‐ranking
positions,
are
as
powerless,
when
confronted
with
unknown
situations
as
a
child.
MJ:
How
did
the
idea
for
Oskar
first
come
to
you?
JSF:
My
test
for
writing
is
always,
is
this
fun
or
does
it
feel
like
a
job?
Is
it
moving
me?
Or
am
I
just
fulfilling
my
own
expectations—or
even
worse,
somebody
else’s?
I
was
working
on
another
story
and
I
just
started
to
feel
the
drag
of
it.
And
so,
as
a
side
project,
I
got
interested
in
the
voice
of
this
kid.
I
thought
maybe
it
could
be
a
story;
maybe
it
would
be
nothing.
I
found
myself
spending
more
and
more
time
on
it
and
wanting
to
work
on
that.
(JWS)
Jonathan
Safran
Foer
manages
to
make
his
child
narrator
sound
like
an
independent
person,
with
a
character
of
his
own
and
not
like
a
figure
that
the
author
has
invented.
I
suppose
that
once
the
writer
has
an
idea
of
his
protagonist
in
mind,
the
child’s
way
of
expression
comes
about
naturally,
because
the
writer
has
a
global
idea
in
mind
of
his
figure’s
nature.
Yet,
according
to
Laura
Miller,
Oskar
resembles
nothing
so
much
as
a
plastic
bag
crammed
with
oddities.
For
every
eccentricity
that
makes
psychological
sense
–
fear
of
public
transportation
or
an
overly
clinical
interest
in
the
bombing
of
Hiroshima,
for
example
–
there’s
another
that’s
just
piled
on.
We
never
learn
why
Oskar
insists
on
wearing
only
white
or
plays
the
tambourine
incessantly.
(LM)
While
Jonathan
Safran
Foer
explains
that
he
has
allowed
his
creativity
to
take
over,
when
he
was
constructing
Oskar’s
character,
Laura
Miller
criticizes
that
the
author
has
not
succeeded
in
bestowing
psychological
realism
on
his
child
character.
On
the
one
hand,
Laura
Miller
is
right,
when
she
says
that
Oskar
is
like
‘a
plastic
bag
crammed
with
oddities,’
because
the
child
displays
numerous
fads
and
spleens
that
pepper
the
complete
narrative.
Laura
Miller
makes
this
diagnosis
sound
like
a
negative
feature,
though
and
it
seems
as
if
the
critic
wants
to
point
out
that
Jonathan
Safran
Foer
has
failed
at
creating
a
psychologically
coherent
character.
However,
Oskar
has
experienced
deep
psychological
and
emotional
trauma
and
no
128
one
can
accurately
predict,
which
and
how
many
oddities
an
individual
develops,
as
a
consequence
to
a
personal
ordeal.
Consequently,
labelling
Jonathan
Safran
Foer’s
novel
as
a
psychologically
unrealistic
construct
is
mere
speculation.
Additionally,
Laura
Miller
criticizes
the
fact
that
the
reader
never
gets
to
know,
why
Oskar
behaves
the
way
he
does.
Of
course,
the
most
obvious
explanation
for
the
character’s
strange
manners
is
self-‐explanatory:
when
a
child
has
lost
his
father
in
a
terrorist
attack,
then
there
is
little
room
left
for
wondering,
why
a
child
starts
to
act
in
a
peculiar
way.
So
why
would
an
author
need
to
highlight
this
obvious
factor
even
more?
Moreover,
every
individual
has
odd
ticks,
which
have
developed
and
emerged
over
time,
but
for
most
of
these
fads,
we
ignore,
which
events
in
our
lives
have
triggered
a
tick
or
another.
In
that
respect,
Jonathan
Safran
Foer’s
approach
of
leaving
certain
information
in
the
story
unexplained
is
a
true
to
life
method.
Furthermore,
Mother
Jones
has
asked:
MJ:
When
you’re
writing
about
a
small
child,
do
you
develop
protective
feelings
the
way
you
would
with
a
real
child?
JSF:
Definitely,
and
that
was
one
of
the
things
that
was
painful
about
the
book.
I
knew
I
couldn’t
give
him
what
he
wanted.
I
felt
protective
of
him,
but
I
was
also
creating
the
harms
that
befell
him.
It
was
a
relationship
that
I
felt
deeply.
(JWS)
To
me
it
is
interesting
to
read
that
the
feelings
the
child
narrator
provokes
in
the
reader
are
the
same
feelings
that
are
produced
in
the
writer.
On
the
one
hand,
the
writer’s
statement
provokes
the
reader,
because
it
makes
his
audience
wonder,
why
Jonathan
Safran
Foer
does
not
change
the
events
in
his
story,
in
order
to
come
to
a
happy
end,
when
he
and
the
reader
are
suffering,
when
they
are
confronted
with
the
story’s
tragedy.
On
the
other
hand,
people
want
to
be
confronted
with
reality,
as
painful
as
it
might
be,
rather
than
having
to
deal
with
the
illusion
of
perfection.
A
child
narrator
himself
can
render
a
story
softer
and
more
melodramatic,
because
of
the
child’s
innocent
tone
of
voice
and
because
of
his
naivety.
Accordingly,
the
author
can
and
needs
to
opt
for
a
more
challenging
topic,
which
can
end
in
human
disaster,
in
order
to
maintain
a
certain
level
of
literary
poignancy.
MJ:
Both
of
your
books
have
narrators
who
are,
for
lack
of
a
better
word,
naive.
129
JSF:
Yeah,
they
both
have
a
sort
of
rawness.
Their
limitations
define
them.
In
the
case
of
Alex
in
Everything
Is
Illuminated,
it’s
a
linguistic
limitation.
In
the
case
of
Oskar,
it’s
limitation
of
experience.
He
hasn’t
been
in
the
world
that
much.
In
both
cases,
they
look
at
things
differently,
and
they
help
us
do
the
same,
which
is
one
of
the
virtues
of
books.
They
can
strip
us
of
all
the
ways
we’re
jaded,
or
numb
to
things.
(JWS)
In
a
way,
Jonathan
Safran
Foer’s
statement
admits
that
the
novel’s
characters
show
personal
deficiency,
because
the
narrator
can
only
offer
a
limited
amount
of
experience
and
of
linguistic
complexity.
Yet,
Jonathan
Safran
Foer
emphasizes
that
the
ultimate
goal
of
any
narrator
is
to
trigger
the
reader’s
response
to
and
interest
in
a
certain
topic.
The
narrator
alerts
the
reader’s
awareness
to
the
fact
that
each
topic
offers
several
vantage
points,
from
which
we
can
examine
or
portray
a
problem.
Thus,
the
question
whether
a
child
displays
psychological
accuracy
or
common
childlike
features
or
not,
becomes
irrelevant.
What
matters
is
the
effect
the
narrator
creates
and
not
the
coherent
truthfulness
of
the
narrator,
which
the
writer
has
created.
Moreover,
Jonathan
Safran
Foer’s
novel
Extremely
Loud
&
Incredibly
Close
is
also
a
novel
of
self-‐interest
like
The
Life
Before
Us,
because
the
child
narrator
comments
on
his
personal
daily
experiences.
Extremely
Loud
&
Incredibly
Close
is
not
just
narrated
by
a
child,
but
the
text
also
includes
an
adult
voice.
The
adult
voice
builds
the
contrast
to
the
child’s
reality.
The
adult
voice
speaks
of
possibilities
that
have
been
lost
over
the
course
of
a
life
and
the
child’s
narrative
illustrates
the
possibilities
that
a
life
offers
at
the
start:
‘How
did
that
boy
making
love
behind
that
shed
become
this
man
writing
this
letter
at
this
table?’
(JSF
216).
The
writer
creates
a
fictional
situation
where
all
three
generations;
children,
parents
and
grandparents;
have
to
deal
with
secrets
of
their
own,
on
their
own.
Oskar,
though,
the
youngest
member
of
the
family,
is
the
one,
who
ventures
out
into
the
world
and
looks
for
answers
to
his
questions.
Oskar’s
daily
undertaking
focuses
on
the
revelation
of
the
question,
why
his
father
had
hidden
a
key
in
a
vase
before
his
death
and
which
lock
this
key
belongs
to.
On
the
one
hand,
Oskar’s
trips
help
him
to
escape
home
and
the
thoughts
of
his
father.
Additionally,
Oskar
feels
guilty,
because
he
has
hidden
the
family’s
answer
machine
on
which
the
father
left
a
message
just
before
his
death.
Oskar
uses
his
actions
to
cover
the
father’s
voice,
yet
all
his
actions
are
guided
by
the
father’s
130
voice.
Even
beyond
death
parents
influence
their
children
and
the
father
speaks
to
the
reader
through
his
child,
who
is
the
narrator
of
his
own
story,
but
also
of
the
father,
the
mother’s
and
the
grandparents’
story:
‘”But
if
you
don’t
tell
me
anything,
how
can
I
ever
be
right?”
He
circled
something
in
an
article
and
said,
“Another
way
of
looking
at
it
would
be,
how
can
you
ever
be
wrong?”’
(JSF
9).
If
the
author
includes
a
child
narrator,
the
writer
manages
to
put
the
child’s
world
into
perspective,
by
introducing
an
array
of
ancestors,
whose
habits
and
ideas
explain
the
child’s
development.
Oskar’s
ancestors
had
special
narratives
of
their
own.
The
father’s
death
allows
Oskar
to
construct
his
own
narrative,
based
on
what
the
father
left
him
behind,
in
terms
of
memory.
Thus,
the
child’s
narrative
becomes
a
sort
of
multilevel
biography,
whose
roots
reach
way
back
into
the
past,
and
whose
future
can
be
expanded
in
the
form
of
Oskar’s
life.
Hence,
one
narrative
encompasses
a
broader
amount
of
narratives,
than
becomes
visible
at
first
sight.
Moreover,
Oskar’s
memory
of
his
dad
is,
of
course,
meant
to
move
the
reader
and
to
attract
the
reader’s
sympathy.
The
child
who
has
lost
his
father
points
out
which
consequences
people’s
self-‐righteous
actions
like
acts
of
terrorism
have
on
a
lot
of
other
people;
innocent
people
like
Oscar:
‘I
loved
having
a
dad
who
was
smarter
than
the
New
York
Times,
and
I
loved
how
my
cheek
could
feel
the
hairs
on
his
chest
through
his
T-‐shirt,
and
how
he
always
smelled
like
shaving,
even
at
the
end
of
the
day.
Being
with
him
made
my
brain
quiet.
I
didn’t
have
to
invent
a
thing’
(JSF
12).
If
an
adult
had
lost
his
partner,
then
the
reader
would
also
feel
compassion,
by
hearing
the
same
words,
but
the
effect
would
be
different.
An
adult
woman
mourning
her
husband,
who
was
killed,
falls
under
the
category
of
romance
or
tearjerker.
Astonishing
to
note
is,
why
an
audience
or
the
reader
reacts
so
differently
to
one
and
the
same
lines,
but
voiced
by
different
people.
I
suppose
that
adults
expect
other
adults
to
keep
their
suffering
internally
or
at
least,
to
voice
their
pain
in
a
more
matter
of
fact
way.
The
lines
Oskar
pronounces
sound
melodramatic.
The
reader
finds
it
acceptable
that
a
child
narrator
expresses
his
grief
in
any
way
he
can,
while
an
adult
is
supposed
to
find
the
right
words
without
embarrassing
other
people.
Of
course,
there
are
also
readers,
who
find
any
emotional
expression
too
melodramatic,
like
Laura
Miller,
who
has
argued
earlier
on
that
Extremely
Loud
&
Incredibly
Close
inappropriately
trivializes
the
topic
of
9/11,
by
viewing
the
events
from
a
child’s
point
of
view.
131
132
133
able
to
live
my
life
again,
I
would
do
things
differently.
I
would
change
my
life’
(JSF
184).
Child
narrators
though
can
visualize
the
idea
that
people
of
all
ages
face
the
same
problem
of
making
the
most
of
their
days
and
it
is
even
more
tragic
to
observe
a
child
narrator,
who
falls
short
on
fulfilling
his
life’s
purpose
and
true
goal.
On
the
other
hand,
it
is
most
satisfying
to
observe
that
a
child
learns
from
his
elders,
how
to
act
according
to
his
own
true
nature.
Finally,
the
child
narrator
manages
to
extend
a
conversation
beyond
the
moment,
when
the
conversation
is
taking
place,
because
the
reader
is
allowed
to
share
in
the
child’s
frame
of
mind,
after
the
conversation
and
to
get
a
glimpse
of
what
a
child
extricates
from
a
conversation
with
an
adult:
On
Tuesday
afternoon
I
had
to
go
to
Dr.
Fein.
I
didn’t
understand
why
I
needed
help,
because
it
seemed
to
me
that
you
should
wear
heavy
boots
when
your
dad
dies,
and
if
you
aren’t
wearing
heavy
boots,
then
you
need
help.
But
I
went
anyway,
because
the
raise
in
my
allowance
depended
on
it.
(JSF
200)
Of
course,
it
is
true
that
an
adult
narrator
can
also
grant
the
reader
an
insight
into
his
train
of
thoughts
after
the
conversation
has
taken
place,
which
can
be
equally
interesting
for
the
reader.
Yet,
it
is
more
interesting
to
read
about
a
child’s
perspective,
because
the
child’s
view
mostly
goes
unnoticed.
Psychologists,
teachers,
politicians
and
parents
nowadays
focus
more
on
attributing
a
voice
to
young
people,
but
the
child’s
reality
remains
generally
discussed
from
an
adult’s
point
of
view.
Adults
decide
what
is
best
for
children,
without
at
least
consulting
their
kids:
‘Most
of
the
kids
in
my
class
have
ADD’
(JSF
142).
Parents
seem
to
individually
act
responsibly
by
trying
to
find
remedies
for
their
children’s
behaviour,
but
children
observe
the
extent
of
the
measures
that
parents
have
taken,
because
they
are
confronted
with
each
other
as
a
group.
Children
make
adults’
alleged
rational
behaviour
seem
irrational
and
relativize
the
adult’s
action.
Of
course,
in
order
to
highlight
this
fact,
a
novel
can
also
be
written
from
a
teacher
or
educator’s
point
of
view,
because
he
also
views
children’s
developments
within
a
group
context.
Yet,
children
also
form
groups
and
act,
even
more
freely
in
groups,
outside
of
school.
So,
it
is
logical
that
a
child
can
portray
a
group
reality
more
accurately
than
an
adult.
Jonathan
Safran
Foer
offers
his
child
narrator
the
possibility
to
discuss
the
outcome
of
adult-‐child
interaction
from
a
child’s
perspective.
The
scene
between
Dr.
Fein
and
Oskar
shows
anew,
like
in
Momo’s
134
case,
that
adults
have
an
idea
in
mind,
of
what
is
psychologically
best
for
a
child,
and
adults
feel
good
about
the
alleged
remedy
that
they
have
come
up
with.
The
adult
plan
might
be
elaborate,
but
might
fail
to
take
into
account
the
broader
picture.
Finally,
on
the
one
hand,
we
have
argued
that
children
and
their
innocent
and
naïve
voice
can
render
a
novel
overtly
romantic
or
even
kitsch,
which
diminishes
a
story’s
intellectual
seriousness.
On
the
other
hand,
since
we
stereotypically
believe
a
child
to
behave
shier
and
in
a
calmer
way,
a
child,
who
loses
his
temper
can
develop
a
more
shocking
emotional
impact,
which
shakes
the
reader
and
makes
him
want
to
react:
‘I
keep
smashing
the
skull
against
his
skull,
which
is
also
RON’s
skull
(for
letting
MOM
get
on
with
life)
and
MOM’s
skull
(for
getting
on
with
life)
and
DAD’s
skull
(for
dying)
and
GRANDMA’s
skull
(for
embarrassing
me
so
much)
and
DR.
FEIN’s
skull
(for
asking
if
any
good
could
come
out
of
dad’s
death)
and
the
skulls
of
everyone
else
I
know’
(JSF
146).
The
actions
of
the
adult
world
shake
the
child’s
world
and
render
him
almost
mad.
In
contrast,
the
child’s
words
are
so
shocking
that
they
can
make
the
reader
shudder.
Thus,
in
the
end,
the
child
narrator
represents
the
entity
that
stands
in
contrast
to
the
adult
world.
The
two
worlds
influence
and
complement
each
other,
in
order
to
form
a
complex
network
of
necessary
and
challenging
human
interaction.
135
136
First
of
all,
we
have
discovered
that
a
child
narrator
can
render
a
novel
more
emotionally
charged
and
challenging
for
the
reader,
which
makes
the
reader
feel
more
involved.
In
addition,
the
child’s
negative
emotional
reaction
or
development,
throughout
a
novel,
can
render
a
novel’s
message
more
emotionally
shocking
or
poignant,
which
livens
up
the
reading
process.
In
contrast,
we
need
to
acknowledge
that
child
narrators
are
not
always
suitable
for
the
transmission
of
a
message,
because
a
child’s
voice
also
brings
about
shortcomings.
One
drawback
is
for
example
that
a
child
narrator
can
render
a
novel
soppier
and
circumcise
the
poignancy
and
cutting-‐edge
seriousness
of
a
topic.
A
child’s
voice
can
render
a
novel
more
emotionally
tainted
and
have
the
effect
that
a
text
which
centres
on
a
serious
social
matter
can
be
perceived
by
the
reader
as
a
tearjerker
and
as
overtly
fishing
for
the
reader’s
sympathy.
However,
the
way
in
which
a
reader
perceives
a
character
and
a
text’s
message
also
depends
on
the
reader’s
frame
of
mind
and
experience.
Now,
in
the
end,
we
need
to
ask
the
questions
whether
there
is
such
a
literary
device
as
a
stereotypical
child
narrator
or
if
all
child
narrators
are
different
because
of
the
authors’
individuality.
On
the
one
hand,
there
are
indicators
that
reveal
that
all
child
narrators
are
individuals,
because
in
each
novel,
the
child
narrator
has
a
different
name,
for
instance.
Names
generally
stand
for
individuality,
because
they
distinguish
people
and
characters.
When
a
literary
figure
does
not
have
a
name,
this
use
usually
means
that
the
character
is
interchangeable
and
that
the
nameless
character
is
meant
to
represent
the
common
person.
In
the
novels
discussed
in
this
paper,
the
characters
have
individual
names,
like
Oskar,
Lawrence,
Christopher,
and
Momo.
In
Momo’s
case,
who
is
at
times
called
Mohammed,
the
child’s
name
is
even
used
in
order
to
convey
different
kinds
of
meaning.
Thus,
the
fact
that
all
child
narrators
have
different
names
indicates,
on
a
first
level,
that
all
those
literary
figures
have
an
independent
nature.
Moreover,
a
different
author
has
created
each
individual
character.
Thus,
a
different
writer
is
the
source
of
each
narrator.
So,
also
the
product
is
each
time
different.
In
the
beginning
we
have
asked
the
question
whether
a
child
narrator
mirrors
the
author’s
social
and
cultural
background
or
whether
all
child
narrators
are
identical.
My
research
has
shown
that
author
and
narrator
are
intrinsically
138
linked
and
that
the
author’s
experiences
influence
or
colour
the
nature
of
his
literary
figure.
Even
if
the
author
wants
to
detach
himself
from
his
character,
the
distance
the
author
strives
and
manages
to
achieve
reflects
the
writer’s
background
and
culture,
too.
In
addition,
the
narrator
does
not
just
mirror
the
author’s
social
and
cultural
background,
but
the
importance
and
seriousness
a
reader
attributes
to
the
child
narrator
also
reflects
the
reader’s
social,
ethical,
and
cultural
background
and
experience
and
bears
witness
to
the
attitude
towards
children,
which
the
people
surrounding
the
author
display.
To
sum
up,
on
the
one
hand,
each
child
narrator
is
unique
in
terms
of
his
origin,
in
terms
of
his
individual
character
traits,
in
terms
of
the
function
he
serves
and
in
terms
of
the
different
ways
in
which
he
can
be
understood
by
various
readers.
On
the
other
hand,
which
are
the
features
that
all
child
narrators
have
in
common?
First,
in
all
the
novels
that
we
have
discussed
throughout
the
present
thesis,
all
the
child
narrators
are
male.
On
the
one
hand,
this
fact
is
a
coincidence,
because
there
are
novels
featuring
child
narrators
that
have
a
girl’s
voice,
like
To
Kill
a
Mockingbird
(1960),
by
Harper
Lee,
which
is
narrated
by
Jean
Louise
‘Scout’
Finch.
On
the
other
hand,
if
we
assume
that
the
author
identifies
with
his
narrator
or
that
an
author
wants
to
keep
a
link
between
himself
and
his
creation,
then
it
is
understandable
that
the
narrators
in
the
novels
we
have
discussed
are
male,
because
their
respective
authors
are
male.
If
we
have
a
second
glance
at
Harper
Lee,
we
notice
that
a
female
author
has
chosen
a
female
child
narrator,
which
would
prove
my
theory
that
the
author
looks
to
maintain
a
link
between
himself
and
his
literary
figure.
On
the
one
hand,
the
character
has
been
removed
from
the
author,
because
the
narrator
is
a
child.
On
the
other
hand,
narrator
and
author
are
linked
by
the
fact
that
they
share
the
same
sex.
Additionally,
all
the
mentioned
stories
are
not
child-‐centred.
They
all
focus
on
broader
social
issues,
like
death,
love,
prostitution,
and
financial
hardship.
Like
Anne
Schulock
says:
Because
for
all
their
cuteness,
the
novels
are
really
about
surviving
death
and
loss.
Several
of
the
characters
assemble
literal
survival
kits,
that
include
items
like
a
139
telescope,
compasses,
drafting
paper,
duct
tape
(…)
But
what
good
is
a
compass
or
stuffed
animal
–
where
can
you
go,
and
what
second-‐rate
comfort
will
you
find?
–
when
you
are
a
child
whose
parents
or
sibling
has
died?
(ASL)
That
the
topics
are
portrayed
from
a
child’s
perspective
is
more
a
literary
device
or
a
function,
as
explained
before,
than
a
real
concern
for
the
child’s
voice.
Of
course,
we
can
argue
that
Jonathan
Safran
Foer
and
Romain
Gary
especially
picked
a
child
as
the
transmitter
of
their
message,
because
they
did
not
feel
comfortable
with
the
combination
of
an
adult
voice
and
the
political
concerns
discussed
in
their
novels.
However,
vice
versa,
we
can
say
that
their
choice
is
one
based
on
the
wish
to
exclude
the
adult
voice,
rather
than
on
the
desire
to
introduce
a
child’s
narrative.
Moreover,
the
two
novels
tell
us
how
adults
think
that
children
cope
with
death,
illness,
and
sex.
It’s
the
adults’
interpretation
of
the
children’s
behaviour,
but
the
child’s
real
feelings
are
kept
from
us.
Of
course,
the
reader
associates
the
text’s
message
with
a
child
and
thus,
the
reader
is
made
to
think
about
a
child’s
reality.
This
consequence
is
desirable
and
furthering
for
the
child’s
status
in
society,
even
if
the
author’s
intention
was
more
focused
on
the
novel’s
message
than
on
the
child.
Finally,
all
the
novels
featuring
child
narrators,
which
I
have
read,
include
distinct
child
vocabulary,
which
renders
the
novels
more
authentic.
However,
the
novels
are
not
consistently
written
in
child
language,
but
children’s
expressions
are
combined
with
adult
talk.
Pure
child
language
would
generally
limit
the
author’s
possibilities
of
expressing
his
concern
and
of
transmitting
the
text’s
intended
message.
Which
consequence
this
approach
has
on
the
child
has
also
been
discussed
in
the
foregoing
discussion.
Finally,
both
novels
clearly
draw
attention
to
the
fact
that
the
narrator
is
a
child.
In
Extremely
Loud,
Oskar
says:
‘I’m
not
allowed
to
watch
TV
at
home’
(JSF
4).
This
fact
highlights
that
the
author
wants
to
attract
the
reader’s
sympathy
and
make
him
side
with
the
narrator,
in
order
to
render
him
more
open
and
alert
for
the
narrative’s
message.
Oskar
says:
‘He
asked,
“How
old
are
you?”
I
said
seven,
because
I
wanted
him
to
feel
more
sorry
for
me,
so
he
would
help
me’
(JSF
90).
Child
narrators
manage
to
manipulate
the
other
characters
in
the
story
and
the
reader.
In
conclusion,
in
The
Life
Before
Us,
Momo
phrases
it
quite
right
when
he
says:
‘in
my
opinion
you
can’t
judge
everything
by
the
same
standards,
like
turtles
140
and
hippopotamuses,
for
instance,
because
they
are
just
not
the
same
as
other
people’
(RG
163).
So,
even
if
there
are
two
child
narrators
who
embody
the
same
character
traits
or
who
address
similar
problems,
then
one
can
still
not
say
that
all
child
narrators
are
the
same.
Each
novel
and
each
novel’s
message
are
different
and
consequently,
the
characters
who
narrate
these
stories
are
also
independent
individuals.
The
entity,
which
creates
a
significant
difference,
between
reading
a
novel
with
a
child
narrator
and
reading
a
novel
with
an
adult
narrator,
is
the
reader.
When
the
reader
knows
that
the
narrator
is
a
nine-‐year-‐old
child,
because
that
has
been
pointed
out
at
the
beginning
of
the
story,
then
during
the
reading
process
the
reader
creates
images
of
a
child
in
his
head,
who
is
experiencing
what
is
described
on
the
page.
The
message
that
the
author
wants
to
transmit
would
just
as
clearly
have
come
across
if
there
had
been
an
adult
narrator,
but
on
an
emotional
level
the
appeal
would
have
been
a
completely
different
one.
Reading
about
and
imagining
a
child
having
a
hard
time
and
meeting
different
kinds
of
people,
raises
in
the
reader
a
natural
instinct
to
protect
the
child.
The
reader
is
much
more
alert
to
the
emotional
and
physical
distress
of
the
child
narrator
than
he
would
be
to
that
of
an
adult
character,
because
adults
have
more
power
to
sort
themselves
out.
The
reader
feels
more
involved
and
more
personally
challenged
as
an
instance
of
authority
and
support
than
as
if
the
perspective
of
another
adult
had
been
presented.
According
to
Mary
L.
Northway
that
‘”we
see
things
not
as
they
are,
but
as
we
are”
has
become
a
psychological
platitude,’46
but
a
text
is
as
much
an
author’s
construct
as
it
is
a
reader’s
creation.
It
depends
on
the
reader
if
a
child
narrator
turns
into
a
laughing
stock
or
if
the
reader
feels
more
deeply
involved,
because
of
the
child
character.
Finally,
do
I
think
that
my
aim
of
analyzing
the
child
narrator
has
been
reached?
On
a
first
level,
I
believe
that
I
have
managed
to
narrow
down
and
define
the
majority
of
aspects
in
relation
to
child
narrators.
I
have
analyzed
the
different
perspectives
from
which
a
child
narrator
can
talk
and
highlighted
the
advantages
and
disadvantages
that
a
child
narrator
can
bring
about.
46
Northway,
Mary
L.
and
Joyce
Detweiler.
“Children’s
Perception
of
Friends
and
Non-‐Friends.”
Bibliography
Primary
Reading
GARY,
Romain
(Emile
Ajar).
The
Life
Before
Us.
New
York:
New
Directions
Books.
1978.
SAFRAN
FOER,
Jonathan.
Extremely
Loud
&
Incredibly
Close.
London:
Penguin
Books.
2006.
HADDON,
Mark.
The
Curious
Incident
of
the
Dog
in
the
Night-Time.
London:
Vintage.
2004.
KNEALE,
Matthew.
When
We
Were
Romans.
London:
Picador.
2008.
Secondary
Reading
Cited
Works
ABRAMS,
M.
H.
A
Glossary
of
Literary
Terms
(7th
edition).
Boston:
Heinle
&
Heinle.
1999.
ALMEN,
Byron.
“Narrative
Archetypes:
A
Critique,
Theory,
and
Method
of
Narrative
Analysis.”
Journal
of
Music
Theory
47.1
(Spring
2003):
1-‐39.
BEYERLEIN,
Craig
and
David
Sikkink.
“Sorrow
and
Solidarity:
Why
Americans
Volunteered
for
9/11
Relief
Efforts.”
Social
Problems
55.2
(May
2008):
190-‐
215.
BIELBY,
D.D.
“Commitment
to
Work
and
Family.”
Annual
Review
of
Sociology
18
(1992):
281-‐302.
BLANCHARD,
Phyllis.
“Status
of
the
Child.”
The
American
Journal
of
Sociology
35.6
(May
1930):
1085-‐1090.
BOORSCH,
Jean.
“Romain
Gary.”
Yale
French
Studies
8,
What’s
Novel
in
the
Novel
(1951):
51-‐55.
BLODGETT,
Harriet.
“Necessary
Presence:
The
Rhetoric
of
the
Narrator
in
Vanity
Fair.”
Nineteenth-Century
Fiction
22.3
(Dec.
1967):
211-‐223.
BRUCE,
Robert.
Cliffs
Notes
On
Twain’s
Huckleberry
Finn.
N.Y.:
Wiley
Publishing.
2000.
143
BRYANT,
Sophie.
“Antipathy
and
Sympathy.”
Mind,
New
Series
4.15
(Jul.
1895):
365-‐370.
CHESTER,
Alexander.
“Antipathy
and
Social
Behavior.”
The
American
Journal
of
Sociology
51.4
(Jan.
1946):
288-‐292.
CROTTY,
Patrick.
“’All
Toppers’:
Children
in
the
Fiction
of
John
McGahern.”
Irish
University
Review
35.1
Special
Issue:
John
McGahern
(Spring-‐Summer
2005):
42-‐57.
DONNELLY,
Brian.
“Inventing
a
Voice:
Irish
Fiction
from
1800.”
The
Harp
15
(2000):
65-‐74.
FERRUCCI,
Franco.
“The
Dead
Child:
A
Romantic
Myth.”
MLN
104.1
(Jan.
1989):
117-‐134.
FISCHER,
Therese.
“From
Reliable
to
Unreliable
Narrator:
Rhetorical
Changes
in
Joyce’s
‘The
Sisters.’”
James
Joyce
Quarterly
9.1
(Fall
1971):
85-‐92.
GRELLET,
Françoise.
Literature
in
English:
Anthologie
des
Littératures
du
Monde
Anglophone.
Paris:
Hachette
Supérieur.
2002.
HOWARD,
Judith
A.
“Social
Psychology
of
Identities.”
Annual
Review
of
Sociology
26
(2000):
367-‐393.
KNOEPFLMACHER,
U.C.
“The
Balancing
of
Child
and
Adult:
An
Approach
to
Victorian
Fantasies
for
Children.”
Nineteenth-Century
Fiction
37.4
(Mar.
1983):
497-‐530.
McCALL
SMITH,
Alexander.
Collins
Dictionary
of
Quotations.
Glasgow:
Harper
Collins.
2003.
McKEE,
Jane.
“The
Symbolic
Imagination
of
Romain
Gary.”
The
Maynooth
Review
6.2
(May
1982):
60-‐71.
NORTHWAY,
Mary
L.
and
Joyce
Detweiler.
“Children’s
Perception
of
Friends
and
Non-‐Friends.”
Sociometry
18.4
Sociometry
and
the
Science
of
Man
(Nov.
1955):
271-‐275.
OCHS,
Elinor
and
Lisa
Capps.
“Narrating
the
Self.”
Annual
Review
of
Anthropology
25
(1996):
19-‐43.
SCHAPIRO,
Tamar.
“What
is
a
Child?”
Ethics
109.4
(Jul.
1999):
715-‐738.
SCHNEIDER,
Helena.
Harper
Lee
“To
Kill
a
Mockingbird”
(1960)
–
Die
Perspektive
des
Kindes.
Nordherderstedt:
GRIN
Verlag.
2004.
STEELE
Alexander.
Gotham
Writer’s
Workshop:
Writing
Fiction
–
The
Practical
144
Guide
from
New
York’s
acclaimed
Creative
Writing
School.
N.Y.:
Bloomsbury.
2003.
TANNER,
Tony.
“The
Literary
Children
of
James
and
Clemens.”
Nineteenth-Century
Fiction
16.3
(Dec.
1961):
205-‐218.
VOGRIN,
Valerie.
“Point
of
View:
The
Complete
Menu,”
in
Alexander
Steele.
Gotham
Writer’s
Workshop:
Writing
Fiction
–
The
Practical
Guide
from
New
York’s
acclaimed
Creative
Writing
School.
N.Y.:
Bloomsbury.
2003.
WOLFF,
Larry.
“When
I
Imagine
a
Child:
The
Idea
of
Childhood
and
the
Philosophy
of
Memory
in
the
Enlightenment.”
Eighteenth-Century
Studies
31.4
The
Mind/
Body
Problem
(Summer
1998):
377-‐401.
Cited
Online
Sources
KIM,
Jocelyn,
Andrew
Wong,
and
Jean
Wong.
“Children
as
Inherently
Good.”
Umich.edu:
http://www.umich.edu/~ece/student_projects/childrens_lit/Children_as_G
ood.html
KOTH,
Amit.
“Socrates.”
Quotationsbook.com:
http://quotationsbook.com/quote/44998/#ixzz1K9ef61bh
LAMBERT,
Tim.
“A
Brief
History
of
Children.”
Localhistories.org:
http://www.localhistories.org/children.html
MALONEY,
Evan.
“Why
Young
Narrators
So
Often
Sound
Phony.”
Guardian.co.uk:
http://www.guardian.co.uk/books/booksblog/2010/feb/03/young-‐
narrators-‐sound-‐phony
MILLER,
Laura.
“Terror
Comes
to
Tiny
Town.”
Nymag.com:
http://nymag.com/print/?/nymetro/arts/books/reviews/11574
SCHULOCK,
Anne.
“In
Praise
of
Precocious
Narrators.”
Themillions.com:
http://www.themillions.com/2010/07/in-‐praise-‐of-‐precocious-‐
narrators.html
SERAPHINOFF,
Michael.
“Through
a
Child’s
Eyes:
A
Special
Role
of
the
Child
as
Narrator
in
Macedonian
Literature.”
Macedonianlit.com:
http://www.macedonianlit.com/pdfs/critical/Through%20a%20Child's%2
0Eyes.pdf
WIKIPEDIA.
“Child.”
Wikipedia.org:
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Child
WOLF
SCHENK,
Joshua.
“Jonathan
Safran
Foer:
Living
to
Tell
the
Tale.”
Motherjones.com:
http://motherjones.com/media/2005/05/jonathan-‐
145
safran-‐foer
Additional
Reading
Consulted
Works
BRIDGES,
William
E.
“Family
Patterns
and
Social
Values
in
America.”
American
Quarterly
17.1
(Spring
1965):
3-‐11.
BYRNE,
George.
“The
Child
in
Literature.”
The
Furrow
3.4
(Apr.
1952):
183-‐
188.
CUNNINGTON,
Phillis
&
Anne
Buck.
Children’s
Costume
in
England:
From
the
Fourteenth
to
the
End
of
the
Nineteenth
Century.
London:
Adam
&
Charles
Blacke.
1965.
HÄRDLING,
Roger,
Hanna
Kokko,
and
Kathryn
E.
Arnold.
“Dynamics
of
the
Caring
Family.”
The
American
Naturalist
161.3
(Mar.
2003):
395-‐412.
JAGER,
Eric.
“The
Parrot’s
Voice:
Language
and
Self
in
Robinson
Crusoe.”
Eighteenth-Century
Studies
21.3
(Spring
1988):
316-‐333.
LEVY,
Leo
B.
“Society
and
Conscience
in
Huckleberry
Finn.”
Nineteenth-Century
Fiction
18.4
(Mar.
1964):
383-‐391.
PLUMB,
J.H.
“The
New
World
of
Children
in
Eighteenth-‐Century
England.”
Past
and
Present
67.1
(1975):
64-‐95.
ROBINSON,
E.
Arthur.
“The
Two
‘Voices’
in
Huckleberry
Finn.”
Modern
Language
Notes
75.3
(Mar.
1960):
204-‐208.
SHUNAMI,
Gideon.
“The
Unreliable
Narrator
in
Wuthering
Heights.”
Nineteenth-
146
147